Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of ABB Group. All other brand or product
names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB Inc.
940 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would
create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal
injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures
are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product
standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The IED is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and
ANSI C37.90. The DNP protocol implementation in the IED conforms to "DNP3
Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) Certification Procedure Subset Level 2", available
at www.dnp.org .
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction..........................................................................29
This manual............................................................................................29
Intended audience..................................................................................29
Product documentation...........................................................................30
Product documentation set................................................................30
Document revision history.................................................................31
Related documents............................................................................32
Symbols and conventions.......................................................................32
Safety indication symbols..................................................................32
Manual conventions...........................................................................33
Section 2
Available functions..............................................................35
Main protection functions........................................................................35
Back-up protection functions..................................................................35
Control and monitoring functions............................................................36
Designed to communicate......................................................................39
Basic IED functions.................................................................................39
Section 3
Analog inputs.......................................................................41
Introduction.............................................................................................41
Operation principle..................................................................................41
Settings...................................................................................................42
Section 4
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification......................................................................................49
Function block...................................................................................49
Signals...............................................................................................49
Settings..............................................................................................49
Operation principle..................................................................................51
Local HMI...........................................................................................51
Display..........................................................................................52
LEDs.............................................................................................54
Keypad.........................................................................................54
LED....................................................................................................57
Functionality.................................................................................57
Status LEDs..................................................................................57
Indication LEDs............................................................................57
Function keys.....................................................................................67
Functionality.................................................................................67
Operation principle.......................................................................67
Section 5
Differential protection..........................................................71
Transformer differential protection..........................................................71
Functionality ......................................................................................71
Transformer differential protection T3WPDIF (87T)..........................73
Identification.................................................................................73
Function block..............................................................................73
Signals..........................................................................................73
Settings.........................................................................................74
Monitored data..............................................................................76
Operation principle............................................................................76
Function calculation principles......................................................77
Fundamental frequency differential currents................................78
Differential current alarm..............................................................84
Bias current..................................................................................84
Elimination of zero sequence currents.........................................84
Restrained, and unrestrained limits of the differential
protection......................................................................................85
Fundamental frequency negative sequence differential
currents.........................................................................................88
Internal/external fault discriminator...............................................90
Unrestrained, and sensitive negative sequence protections........94
Instantaneous differential currents...............................................96
Harmonic and waveform block criteria.........................................96
2
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 6
Impedance protection........................................................127
Underimpedance protection for generators and transformers
ZGPDIS (21G)......................................................................................127
Identification....................................................................................127
Functionality....................................................................................127
Function block.................................................................................128
Signals.............................................................................................128
Settings............................................................................................129
Operation principle..........................................................................130
Full scheme measurement.........................................................130
Impedance characteristic............................................................130
Basic operation characteristics...................................................131
3
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Theory of operation....................................................................132
Technical data.................................................................................134
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS (40)..........................................................134
Identification....................................................................................134
Functionality....................................................................................134
Function block.................................................................................135
Signals.............................................................................................135
Settings............................................................................................136
Operation principle..........................................................................136
Technical data.................................................................................140
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM (78)................................................140
Identification....................................................................................140
Functionality....................................................................................141
Function block.................................................................................141
Signals.............................................................................................141
Settings............................................................................................142
Operation principle..........................................................................143
Lens characteristic......................................................................146
Detecting an out-of-step condition..............................................148
Maximum slip frequency.............................................................149
Taking care of the circuit breaker safety.....................................150
Design........................................................................................152
Technical data.................................................................................153
Load encroachment LEPDIS ...............................................................154
Identification....................................................................................154
Functionality....................................................................................154
Function block.................................................................................154
Signals.............................................................................................155
Settings............................................................................................155
Operation principle..........................................................................155
Load encroachment....................................................................156
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................156
Technical data.................................................................................157
Section 7
Current protection..............................................................159
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51/67).................159
Identification ...................................................................................159
Functionality....................................................................................159
Function block.................................................................................160
Signals.............................................................................................160
4
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................161
Monitored data.................................................................................163
Operation principle..........................................................................163
Technical data.................................................................................166
Four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N)..........166
Identification ...................................................................................166
Functionality....................................................................................167
Function block.................................................................................167
Signals.............................................................................................167
Settings............................................................................................168
Monitored data.................................................................................171
Operation principle..........................................................................171
Operating quantity within the function........................................171
Internal polarizing.......................................................................172
External polarizing for ground-fault function...............................174
Base quantities within the protection..........................................175
Internal ground-fault protection structure....................................175
Four residual overcurrent steps..................................................175
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function...................................................................176
Technical data.................................................................................179
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE (67N)...................................................................................180
Identification....................................................................................180
Functionality....................................................................................180
Function block.................................................................................181
Signals.............................................................................................181
Settings............................................................................................182
Monitored data.................................................................................184
Operation principle .........................................................................184
Function inputs...........................................................................184
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos .......184
Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3V0
cos ...........................................................................................187
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and ......188
Directional functions...................................................................189
Non-directional ground fault current protection..........................189
Residual overvoltage release and protection.............................189
Technical data.................................................................................191
Thermal overload protection, two time constants TRPTTR (49)...........192
5
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification ...................................................................................192
Functionality....................................................................................192
Function block.................................................................................193
Signals.............................................................................................193
Settings............................................................................................194
Monitored data.................................................................................195
Operation principle..........................................................................195
Technical data.................................................................................199
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF)..........................................199
Identification....................................................................................199
Functionality....................................................................................199
Function block.................................................................................200
Signals.............................................................................................200
Settings............................................................................................201
Monitored data.................................................................................201
Operation principle..........................................................................202
Technical data.................................................................................203
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD).....................................204
Identification ...................................................................................204
Functionality....................................................................................204
Function block.................................................................................204
Signals.............................................................................................205
Settings............................................................................................205
Monitored data.................................................................................206
Operation principle..........................................................................206
Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker.........................207
Unsymmetrical current detection................................................208
Technical data.................................................................................208
Directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP
(32/37)..................................................................................................208
Functionality....................................................................................208
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)..........................209
Identification...............................................................................209
Function block............................................................................209
Signals........................................................................................210
Settings.......................................................................................210
Monitored data............................................................................211
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37).........................211
Identification...............................................................................212
Function block............................................................................212
6
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals........................................................................................212
Settings.......................................................................................213
Monitored data............................................................................214
Operation principle..........................................................................214
Low pass filtering........................................................................216
Technical data.................................................................................217
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator
AEGGAPC (50AE)................................................................................218
Identification....................................................................................218
Functionality ...................................................................................218
Function block.................................................................................218
Signals.............................................................................................219
Settings............................................................................................219
Operation principle..........................................................................220
Technical data.................................................................................221
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines
NS2PTOC (46I2)..................................................................................221
Identification....................................................................................221
Functionality....................................................................................221
Function block.................................................................................222
Signals.............................................................................................223
Settings............................................................................................223
Monitored data.................................................................................224
Operation principle..........................................................................224
Pickup sensitivity........................................................................227
Alarm function.............................................................................227
Logic diagram.............................................................................227
Technical data.................................................................................228
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VR2PVOC (51V).........229
Identification....................................................................................229
Functionality....................................................................................229
Function block.................................................................................229
Signals.............................................................................................230
Settings............................................................................................231
Monitored data.................................................................................232
Operation principle..........................................................................232
Measured quantities...................................................................232
Base quantities...........................................................................232
Overcurrent protection................................................................233
Logic diagram.............................................................................235
7
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Undervoltage protection.............................................................236
Technical data.................................................................................236
Section 8
Voltage protection.............................................................237
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................237
Identification....................................................................................237
Functionality....................................................................................237
Function block.................................................................................237
Signals.............................................................................................238
Settings............................................................................................238
Monitored data.................................................................................239
Operation principle..........................................................................239
Measurement principle...............................................................240
Time delay..................................................................................240
Blocking......................................................................................241
Design........................................................................................241
Technical data.................................................................................243
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59).................................243
Identification....................................................................................243
Functionality....................................................................................243
Function block.................................................................................244
Signals.............................................................................................244
Settings............................................................................................245
Monitored data.................................................................................246
Operation principle..........................................................................246
Measurement principle...............................................................247
Time delay..................................................................................247
Blocking......................................................................................248
Design........................................................................................249
Technical data.................................................................................251
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............251
Identification....................................................................................251
Functionality....................................................................................251
Function block.................................................................................252
Signals.............................................................................................252
Settings............................................................................................253
Monitored data.................................................................................253
Operation principle..........................................................................253
Measurement principle...............................................................254
Time delay..................................................................................254
8
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Blocking......................................................................................255
Design........................................................................................255
Technical data.................................................................................257
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)............................................257
Identification....................................................................................257
Functionality....................................................................................258
Function block.................................................................................258
Signals.............................................................................................258
Settings............................................................................................259
Monitored data.................................................................................259
Operation principle..........................................................................260
Measured voltage.......................................................................262
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.............................262
Cooling.......................................................................................265
Overexcitation protection function measurands.........................265
Overexcitation alarm...................................................................266
Logic diagram.............................................................................266
Technical data.................................................................................266
100% Stator ground fault protection, 3rd harmonic based
STEFPHIZ (59THD)..............................................................................267
Identification....................................................................................267
Functionality....................................................................................267
Function block.................................................................................269
Signals.............................................................................................269
Settings............................................................................................270
Monitored data.................................................................................271
Operation principle..........................................................................271
Technical data.................................................................................276
Section 9
Frequency protection.........................................................277
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................277
Identification....................................................................................277
Functionality....................................................................................277
Function block.................................................................................277
Signals.............................................................................................278
Settings............................................................................................278
Monitored data.................................................................................278
Operation principle..........................................................................278
Measurement principle...............................................................279
Time delay..................................................................................279
9
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Blocking......................................................................................279
Design........................................................................................280
Technical data.................................................................................280
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................281
Identification....................................................................................281
Functionality....................................................................................281
Function block.................................................................................281
Signals.............................................................................................282
Settings............................................................................................282
Monitored data.................................................................................282
Operation principle..........................................................................282
Measurement principle...............................................................283
Time delay..................................................................................283
Blocking......................................................................................283
Design........................................................................................283
Technical data.................................................................................284
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)............................284
Identification....................................................................................285
Functionality....................................................................................285
Function block.................................................................................285
Signals.............................................................................................285
Settings............................................................................................286
Operation principle..........................................................................286
Measurement principle...............................................................286
Time delay..................................................................................287
Design........................................................................................288
Technical data.................................................................................288
Table of contents
Main logic...................................................................................296
Technical data.................................................................................300
Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring TCSSCBR...................................300
Identification....................................................................................300
Functionality....................................................................................300
Function block.................................................................................301
Signals.............................................................................................301
Settings............................................................................................301
Operation principle..........................................................................301
Technical data.................................................................................302
Section 11 Control...............................................................................303
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25).....................................................................................303
Identification....................................................................................303
Functionality....................................................................................303
Function block.................................................................................304
Signals.............................................................................................304
Settings............................................................................................306
Monitored data.................................................................................307
Operation principle..........................................................................308
Basic functionality.......................................................................308
Synchronism check....................................................................308
Synchronizing.............................................................................310
Energizing check........................................................................311
Voltage selection........................................................................312
Fuse failure supervision..............................................................312
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double
busbars.......................................................................................313
Technical data.................................................................................314
Apparatus control..................................................................................315
Functionality....................................................................................315
Bay control QCBAY.........................................................................315
Identification ..............................................................................315
Functionality...............................................................................315
Function block............................................................................316
Signals........................................................................................316
Settings.......................................................................................316
Local remote LOCREM...................................................................317
Identification ..............................................................................317
11
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Functionality...............................................................................317
Function block............................................................................317
Signals........................................................................................317
Settings.......................................................................................318
Local remote control LOCREMCTRL..............................................318
Identification ..............................................................................318
Functionality...............................................................................318
Function block............................................................................318
Signals........................................................................................319
Settings.......................................................................................319
Operation principle..........................................................................320
Bay control QCBAY....................................................................320
Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/
LOCREMCTRL...........................................................................321
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGGIO................................................................................................322
Identification....................................................................................322
Functionality....................................................................................323
Function block.................................................................................323
Signals.............................................................................................323
Settings............................................................................................325
Monitored data.................................................................................325
Operation principle..........................................................................325
Selector mini switch VSGGIO...............................................................326
Identification....................................................................................326
Functionality....................................................................................326
Function block.................................................................................326
Signals.............................................................................................326
Settings............................................................................................327
Operation principle..........................................................................327
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO..................328
Identification....................................................................................328
Functionality....................................................................................328
Function block.................................................................................329
Signals.............................................................................................329
Settings............................................................................................329
Operation principle..........................................................................329
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO...............................330
Identification....................................................................................330
Functionality....................................................................................330
12
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block.................................................................................330
Signals.............................................................................................330
Settings............................................................................................331
Operation principle..........................................................................332
Automation bits AUTOBITS..................................................................332
Identification....................................................................................332
Functionality....................................................................................332
Function block.................................................................................333
Signals.............................................................................................333
Settings............................................................................................334
Operation principle..........................................................................335
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD............................335
Functionality....................................................................................335
Function block.................................................................................335
Signals.............................................................................................336
Settings............................................................................................336
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD.............................336
Functionality....................................................................................336
Function block.................................................................................336
Signals.............................................................................................337
Settings............................................................................................337
Function commands user defined for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRCMD.......................................................................................337
Functionality....................................................................................337
Function block.................................................................................338
Signals.............................................................................................338
Settings............................................................................................338
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.......339
Functionality....................................................................................339
Function block.................................................................................339
Signals.............................................................................................339
Settings............................................................................................340
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD.......................................................................................340
Functionality....................................................................................340
Function block.................................................................................340
Signals.............................................................................................340
Settings............................................................................................341
Section 12 Logic..................................................................................343
13
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................364
Settings............................................................................................365
Monitored data.................................................................................365
Operation principle..........................................................................365
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation
B16IFCVI..............................................................................................365
Identification....................................................................................365
Functionality....................................................................................365
Function block.................................................................................366
Signals.............................................................................................366
Settings............................................................................................367
Monitored data.................................................................................367
Operation principle..........................................................................367
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16A...............................................367
Identification....................................................................................367
Functionality....................................................................................367
Function block.................................................................................368
Signals.............................................................................................368
Settings............................................................................................369
Operation principle..........................................................................369
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
IB16FCVB.............................................................................................369
Identification....................................................................................369
Functionality....................................................................................369
Function block.................................................................................370
Signals.............................................................................................370
Settings............................................................................................371
Operation principle..........................................................................371
Section 13 Monitoring..........................................................................373
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO..................373
Identification....................................................................................373
Functionality....................................................................................373
Function block.................................................................................373
Signals.............................................................................................373
Settings............................................................................................374
Operation principle..........................................................................374
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs
SP16GGIO............................................................................................374
Identification....................................................................................374
Functionality....................................................................................374
15
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block.................................................................................375
Signals.............................................................................................375
Settings............................................................................................376
MonitoredData.................................................................................376
Operation principle..........................................................................377
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO..................377
Identification....................................................................................377
Functionality....................................................................................377
Function block.................................................................................377
Signals.............................................................................................378
Settings............................................................................................378
Monitored data.................................................................................379
Operation principle..........................................................................379
Measurements......................................................................................379
Functionality....................................................................................379
Measurements CVMMXN................................................................381
Identification ..............................................................................381
Function block............................................................................381
Signals........................................................................................381
Settings.......................................................................................382
Monitored data............................................................................386
Phase current measurement CMMXU.............................................386
Identification ..............................................................................386
Function block............................................................................386
Signals........................................................................................387
Settings.......................................................................................388
Monitored data............................................................................389
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU.................................389
Identification ..............................................................................389
Function block............................................................................389
Signals........................................................................................390
Settings.......................................................................................390
Monitored data............................................................................391
Current sequence component measurement CMSQI.....................391
Identification ..............................................................................391
Function block............................................................................391
Signals........................................................................................392
Settings.......................................................................................392
Monitored data............................................................................394
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI........................................394
16
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification ..............................................................................394
Function block............................................................................394
Signals........................................................................................395
Settings.......................................................................................395
Monitored data............................................................................397
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU..............................397
Identification ..............................................................................397
Function block............................................................................397
Signals........................................................................................398
Settings.......................................................................................399
Monitored data............................................................................399
Operation principle..........................................................................400
Measurement supervision..........................................................400
Measurements CVMMXN...........................................................404
Phase current measurement CMMXU........................................409
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU....................................................................410
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI........................................................................................410
Technical data.................................................................................410
Event Counter CNTGGIO.....................................................................411
Identification....................................................................................411
Functionality....................................................................................411
Function block.................................................................................411
Signals.............................................................................................412
Settings............................................................................................412
Monitored data.................................................................................412
Operation principle..........................................................................413
Reporting....................................................................................413
Technical data.................................................................................413
Disturbance report................................................................................414
Functionality....................................................................................414
Disturbance report DRPRDRE........................................................414
Identification...............................................................................414
Function block............................................................................415
Signals........................................................................................415
Settings.......................................................................................415
Monitored data............................................................................416
Measured values........................................................................419
Analog input signals AxRADR.........................................................420
17
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification...............................................................................420
Function block............................................................................420
Signals........................................................................................420
Settings.......................................................................................421
Analog input signals A4RADR.........................................................425
Identification...............................................................................425
Function block............................................................................425
Signals........................................................................................426
Settings.......................................................................................426
Binary input signals BxRBDR..........................................................430
Identification...............................................................................430
Function block............................................................................430
Signals........................................................................................431
Settings.......................................................................................431
Operation principle..........................................................................437
Disturbance information..............................................................439
Indications .................................................................................439
Event recorder ...........................................................................439
Sequential of events ..................................................................439
Trip value recorder ....................................................................439
Disturbance recorder .................................................................439
Time tagging...............................................................................440
Recording times..........................................................................440
Analog signals............................................................................441
Binary signals.............................................................................442
Trigger signals............................................................................442
Post Retrigger.............................................................................443
Technical data.................................................................................444
Indications.............................................................................................445
Functionality....................................................................................445
Function block.................................................................................445
Signals.............................................................................................445
Input signals...............................................................................445
Operation principle..........................................................................445
Technical data.................................................................................446
Event recorder .....................................................................................446
Functionality....................................................................................446
Function block.................................................................................447
Signals.............................................................................................447
Input signals...............................................................................447
18
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Operation principle..........................................................................447
Technical data.................................................................................448
Sequential of events.............................................................................448
Functionality....................................................................................448
Function block.................................................................................448
Signals.............................................................................................448
Input signals...............................................................................448
Operation principle..........................................................................448
Technical data.................................................................................449
Trip value recorder................................................................................449
Functionality....................................................................................449
Function block.................................................................................449
Signals.............................................................................................450
Input signals...............................................................................450
Operation principle..........................................................................450
Technical data.................................................................................450
Disturbance recorder............................................................................451
Functionality....................................................................................451
Function block.................................................................................451
Signals.............................................................................................451
Settings............................................................................................451
Operation principle..........................................................................451
Memory and storage...................................................................452
Technical data.................................................................................454
Measured value expander block MVEXP.............................................454
Identification....................................................................................454
Functionality....................................................................................454
Function block.................................................................................455
Signals.............................................................................................455
Settings............................................................................................455
Operation principle..........................................................................455
Station battery supervision SPVNZBAT...............................................456
Identification....................................................................................456
Function block.................................................................................456
Functionality....................................................................................456
Signals.............................................................................................457
Settings............................................................................................457
Measured values.............................................................................457
Monitored Data................................................................................458
Operation principle .........................................................................458
19
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Technical data.................................................................................459
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63)....................................459
Identification....................................................................................459
Functionality....................................................................................459
Function block.................................................................................460
Signals.............................................................................................460
Settings............................................................................................461
Operation principle..........................................................................461
Technical data.................................................................................462
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71)..................................462
Identification....................................................................................462
Functionality....................................................................................462
Function block.................................................................................462
Signals.............................................................................................463
Settings............................................................................................463
Operation principle..........................................................................464
Technical data.................................................................................464
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR........................................465
Identification....................................................................................465
Functionality....................................................................................465
Function block.................................................................................465
Signals.............................................................................................466
Settings............................................................................................467
Monitored data.................................................................................468
Operation principle..........................................................................468
Circuit breaker status..................................................................469
Circuit breaker operation monitoring..........................................470
Breaker contact travel time.........................................................471
Operation counter.......................................................................473
Accumulation of Iyt......................................................................473
Remaining life of the circuit breaker...........................................475
Circuit breaker spring charged indication...................................476
Gas pressure supervision...........................................................477
Technical data.................................................................................478
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS......................................478
Functionality....................................................................................478
Function block.................................................................................479
Signals.............................................................................................480
Settings............................................................................................480
20
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 14 Metering............................................................................491
Pulse counter PCGGIO........................................................................491
21
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Identification....................................................................................491
Functionality....................................................................................491
Function block.................................................................................491
Signals.............................................................................................492
Settings............................................................................................492
Monitored data.................................................................................493
Operation principle..........................................................................493
Technical data.................................................................................494
Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR..........................495
Identification....................................................................................495
Functionality....................................................................................495
Function block.................................................................................495
Signals.............................................................................................496
Settings............................................................................................497
Monitored data.................................................................................498
Operation principle..........................................................................498
Technical data.................................................................................499
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................509
Settings............................................................................................510
Operation principle .........................................................................510
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV...................................................................................510
Identification....................................................................................510
Functionality....................................................................................511
Function block.................................................................................511
Signals.............................................................................................511
Settings............................................................................................511
Operation principle .........................................................................511
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV....................................................................................512
Identification....................................................................................512
Functionality....................................................................................512
Function block.................................................................................512
Signals.............................................................................................513
Settings............................................................................................513
Operation principle .........................................................................513
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV....................................................................................514
Identification....................................................................................514
Functionality....................................................................................514
Function block.................................................................................514
Signals.............................................................................................514
Settings............................................................................................515
Operation principle .........................................................................515
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...........................................515
Functionality....................................................................................515
Settings............................................................................................516
Table of contents
Settings.......................................................................................520
Internal event list SELFSUPEVLST.................................................520
Identification...............................................................................520
Settings.......................................................................................520
Operation principle..........................................................................520
Internal signals...........................................................................523
Run-time model..........................................................................524
Technical data.................................................................................525
Time synchronization............................................................................526
Functionality....................................................................................526
Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN.........................................526
Identification...............................................................................526
Settings.......................................................................................526
Time synchronization via SNTP......................................................527
Identification...............................................................................527
Settings.......................................................................................527
Time system, summer time begin DSTBEGIN................................527
Identification...............................................................................527
Settings.......................................................................................528
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND.....................................528
Identification...............................................................................528
Settings.......................................................................................529
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE....................................................529
Identification...............................................................................529
Settings.......................................................................................529
Time synchronization via IRIG-B.....................................................530
Identification...............................................................................530
Settings.......................................................................................530
Operation principle..........................................................................530
General concepts.......................................................................530
Real-time clock (RTC) operation................................................532
Synchronization alternatives.......................................................533
Technical data.................................................................................534
Parameter setting group handling.........................................................534
Functionality....................................................................................534
Setting group handling SETGRPS..................................................535
Identification...............................................................................535
Settings.......................................................................................535
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP..............................................535
Identification...............................................................................535
24
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block............................................................................535
Signals........................................................................................536
Settings.......................................................................................536
Operation principle..........................................................................536
Test mode functionality TESTMODE....................................................537
Identification....................................................................................537
Functionality....................................................................................538
Function block.................................................................................538
Signals.............................................................................................538
Settings............................................................................................539
Operation principle..........................................................................539
Change lock function CHNGLCK .........................................................540
Identification....................................................................................540
Functionality....................................................................................540
Function block.................................................................................541
Signals.............................................................................................541
Settings............................................................................................541
Operation principle..........................................................................541
IED identifiers TERMINALID.................................................................542
Identification....................................................................................542
Functionality....................................................................................542
Settings............................................................................................542
Product information ..............................................................................543
Identification....................................................................................543
Functionality....................................................................................543
Settings............................................................................................543
Primary system values PRIMVAL.........................................................544
Identification....................................................................................544
Functionality....................................................................................544
Settings............................................................................................544
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................544
Functionality....................................................................................544
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_1.....................................544
Identification...............................................................................544
Function block............................................................................545
Signals........................................................................................545
Settings.......................................................................................546
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI_20_2.....................................547
Identification...............................................................................547
Function block............................................................................547
25
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Signals........................................................................................547
Settings.......................................................................................548
Operation principle .........................................................................549
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM....................................................549
Identification....................................................................................549
Functionality....................................................................................549
Function block.................................................................................550
Signals.............................................................................................550
Settings............................................................................................551
Operation principle..........................................................................551
Global base values GBASVAL.............................................................551
Identification....................................................................................551
Functionality....................................................................................551
Settings............................................................................................552
Authority check ATHCHCK...................................................................552
Identification....................................................................................552
Functionality....................................................................................552
Settings............................................................................................552
Operation principle..........................................................................553
Authorization handling in the IED...............................................553
Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................554
Identification....................................................................................554
Functionality....................................................................................554
Function block.................................................................................555
Signals.............................................................................................555
Settings............................................................................................555
Operation principle..........................................................................555
Denial of service...................................................................................555
Functionality....................................................................................555
Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT.........556
Identification...............................................................................556
Function block............................................................................556
Signals........................................................................................556
Settings.......................................................................................556
Monitored data............................................................................557
Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1........557
Identification...............................................................................557
Function block............................................................................557
Signals........................................................................................558
Settings.......................................................................................558
26
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Monitored data............................................................................558
Operation principle..........................................................................558
27
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Section 21 Glossary............................................................................631
28
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
1.1
This manual
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.
1.2
Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in
normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the
IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in
handling electronic equipment.
29
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
Decommissioning
deinstalling & disposal
Maintenance
Operation
Commissioning
1.3.1
Installing
Product documentation
1.3
Engineering
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Service manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication protocol
manual
en07000220.vsd
IEC07000220 V1 EN
Figure 1:
The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set up a
PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends
a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI functions as well
as communication engineering for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP3.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
30
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as
verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing
an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for monitoring, controlling and
setting the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.
The service manual contains instructions on how to service and maintain the IED. The
manual also provides procedures for de-energizing, de-commissioning and disposal of
the IED.
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also be used when calculating settings.
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.
The communication protocol manual describes a communication protocol supported by
the IED. The manual concentrates on vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to
the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.
The service manual is not available yet.
1.3.2
History
First release
31
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
1.3.3
Related documents
Documents related to REG650
Identity number
Application manual
Technical manual
Commissioning manual
Product Guide
Rotor Ground Fault Protection with Injection Unit RXTTE4 and REG670
1MRG001910
Identity number
Engineering manual
Operation manual
Installation manual
1.4
1.4.1
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
in personal injury.
32
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand
that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore,
comply fully with all warning and caution notices.
1.4.2
Manual conventions
Conventions used in IED manuals. A particular convention may not be used in this
manual.
Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons, for example:
To navigate between the options, use
and
.
HMI menu paths are presented in bold, for example:
Select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font, for example:
To save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
Parameter names are shown in italics, for example:
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block
symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set an own signal name in
PCM600.
The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block symbol
given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to another
function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application
configuration.
Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in mm.
33
Technical Manual
34
Section 2
Available functions
Section 2
Available functions
2.1
Function description
Generator
REG650 (B01A)
Gen diff
IEC 61850/
Function block
name
REG650 (B05A)
Gen+Trafo diff
Differential protection
T3WPDIF
87T
HZPDIF
87
GENPDIF
87G
Impedance protection
ZGPDIS
21G
LEXPDIS
40
Loss of excitation
OOSPPAM
78
Out-of-step protection
Load encroachment
LEPDIS
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG650 (B01A)
Gen diff
IEC 61850/
Function block
name
REG650 (B05A)
Gen+Trafo diff
2.2
Current protection
OC4PTOC
51/67
EF4PTOC
51N/67N
SDEPSDE
67N
35
Technical Manual
Section 2
Available functions
Function description
Generator
REG650 (B05A)
Gen+Trafo diff
ANSI
REG650 (B01A)
Gen diff
IEC 61850/
Function block
name
TRPTTR
49
CCRBRF
50BF
CCRPLD
52PD
GUPPDUP
37
GOPPDOP
32
AEGGAPC
50AE
NS2PTOC
46I2
VR2PVOC
51V
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV
27
OV2PTOV
59
ROV2PTOV
59N
OEXPVPH
24
Overexcitation protection
STEFPHIZ
59THD
64R
Frequency protection
SAPTUF
81
Underfrequency function
SAPTOF
81
Overfrequency function
SAPFRC
81
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG650 (B01A)
Gen diff
IEC 61850/Function
block name
REG650 (B05A)
Gen+Trafo diff
2.3
Control
SESRSYN
25
QCBAY
Bay control
Section 2
Available functions
ANSI
Function description
Generator
REG650 (B01A)
Gen diff
IEC 61850/Function
block name
REG650 (B05A)
Gen+Trafo diff
LOCREM
LOCREMCTRL
SLGGIO
15
15
VSGGIO
20
20
DPGGIO
16
16
SPC8GGIO
AUTOBITS
I103CMD
I103IEDCMD
I103USRCMD
I103GENCMD
50
50
I103POSCMD
50
50
SDDRFUF
TCSSCBR
Logic
SMPPTRC
Tripping logic
TMAGGIO
94
12
12
OR
283
283
INVERTER
140
140
PULSETIMER
40
40
GATE
40
40
XOR
40
40
LOOPDELAY
40
40
TIMERSET
40
40
AND
280
280
SRMEMORY
40
40
RSMEMORY
40
40
FXDSIGN
B16I
16
16
B16IFCVI
16
16
IB16A
16
16
Section 2
Available functions
Function description
Generator
IB16FCVB
REG650 (B05A)
Gen+Trafo diff
ANSI
REG650 (B01A)
Gen diff
IEC 61850/Function
block name
16
16
CVMMXN
Measurements
CMMXU
10
10
VMMXU
CMSQI
VMSQI
VNMMXU
CNTGGIO
Event counter
DRPRDRE
Disturbance report
AxRADR
BxRBDR
SPGGIO
64
64
SP16GGIO
16
16
MVGGIO
16
16
MVEXP
66
66
Monitoring
SPVNZBAT
SSIMG
63
SSIML
71
SSCBR
I103MEAS
I103MEASUSR
I103AR
I103EF
I103FLTPROT
I103IED
I103SUPERV
I103USRDEF
20
20
PCGGIO
16
16
ETPMMTR
Metering
38
Technical Manual
Section 2
Available functions
2.4
Designed to communicate
Generator
REG650 (B05A)
Gen+Trafo diff
Function description
REG650 (B01A)
Gen diff
IEC61870-5-103
GOOSEINTLKRCV
59
59
GOOSEBINRCV
ETHFRNT
ETHLAN1
GATEWAY
GOOSEDPRCV
32
32
GOOSEINTRCV
32
32
GOOSEMVRCV
16
16
GOOSESPRCV
64
64
Station communication
2.5
IEC 61850/Function
block name
SELFSUPEVLST
SNTP
Time synchronization
TIMESYNCHGEN
Time synchronization
DTSBEGIN, DTSEND,
TIMEZONE
IRIG-B
Time synchronization
SETGRPS
ACTVGRP
TESTMODE
CHNGLCK
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850/Function
block name
Function description
TERMINALID
IED identifiers
PRODINF
Product information
PRIMVAL
SMAI_20_1-12
3PHSUM
12
GBASVAL
ATHSTAT
Authority status
ATHCHCK
Authority check
FTPACCS
DOSFRNT
DOSLAN1
DOSSCKT
40
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Section 3
Analog inputs
3.1
Introduction
Analog input channels are already configured inside the IED. However the IED has to
be set properly to get correct measurement results and correct protection operations.
For power measuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the
input currents must be defined properly. Measuring and protection algorithms in the
IED use primary system quantities. Set values are done in primary quantities as well
and it is important to set the data about the connected current and voltage transformers
properly.
The availability of CT and VT inputs, as well as setting parameters depends on the
ordered IED.
A reference PhaseAngleRefmust be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degree and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.
3.2
Operation principle
The direction of a current to the IED depends on the connection of the CT. The main
CTs are typically star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE)
point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED.
Directional conventions for current or power, for example
Positive value of current or power means quantity direction into the object.
Negative value of current or power means quantity direction out from the object.
41
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Definition of direction
for directional functions
Reverse
Forward
Forward
Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object
Set parameter
CT_WyePoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"
Set parameter
CT_WyePoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"
en05000456_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000456 V1 EN
Figure 2:
The ratios of the main CTs and VTs must be known to use primary system quantities
for settings and calculation in the IED, The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with this
information.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool.
3.3
Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.
42
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 1:
Name
PhaseAngleRef
Table 2:
Name
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
TRM - Channel 1
Description
Reference channel for phase angle
presentation
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim5
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec6
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim6
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim7
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim8
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
Table 3:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CT_WyePoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim5
1 - 99999
1000
CT_WyePoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim6
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim7
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim8
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
44
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Section 4
4.1
4.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
4.1.2
Table 4:
SCREEN
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Settings
SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Unit
Step
DisplayTimeout
Values (Range)
10 - 120
Min
10
Default
60
Description
Local HMI display timeout
ContrastLevel
-100 - 100
10
DefaultScreen
Main menu
Events
Measurements
Diagnostics
Disturbance
records
Single Line
Diagram
Main menu
Default screen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
AutoIndicationDRP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SubstIndSLD
No
Yes
No
InterlockIndSLD
No
Yes
No
BypassCommands
No
Yes
No
45
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
4.2
4.2.1
Identification
4.2.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
LHMICTRL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS
HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN
Figure 3:
4.2.3
Signals
Table 5:
Name
CLRLEDS
Table 6:
Name
Default
0
Description
Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs
Description
HMI-ON
BOOLEAN
RED-S
BOOLEAN
YELLOW-S
BOOLEAN
YELLOW-F
BOOLEAN
CLRPULSE
BOOLEAN
LEDSCLRD
BOOLEAN
46
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
4.3
4.3.1
Identification
Function description
4.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
LEDGEN
GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15
Function block
LEDGEN
BLOCK
RESET
NEWIND
ACK
IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN
Figure 4:
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN
Figure 5:
The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3 has
a similar function block.
4.3.3
Signals
Table 7:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
47
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Table 8:
Name
Type
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
HM1L01Y
BOOLEAN
HM1L01G
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 10:
Default
HM1L01R
Table 9:
4.3.4
Type
Description
NEWIND
BOOLEAN
ACK
BOOLEAN
Settings
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
tMax
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Table 11:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SequenceType
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
LabelOff
0 - 18
G1L01_OFF
LabelRed
0 - 18
G1L01_RED
LabelYellow
0 - 18
G1L01_YELLOW
LabelGreen
0 - 18
G1L01_GREEN
48
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
4.4
4.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
4.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
^LEDCTL1
FNKEYMD1
^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN
Figure 6:
Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function button.
4.4.3
Signals
Table 12:
Name
Type
LEDCTL1
BOOLEAN
Table 13:
Type
FKEYOUT1
Table 14:
Name
Description
LED control input for function key
Name
4.4.4
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Mode
Off
Toggle
Pulsed
Off
PulseTime
0.001 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
LabelOn
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_ON
LabelOff
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_OFF
49
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Table 15:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Type
Disabled
Menu shortcut
Control
Disabled
MenuShortcut
Main menu
Events
Measurements
Diagnostics
Disturbance
records
Clear
Single Line
Diagram
Main menu
Description
Function key type
50
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
4.5
Operation principle
4.5.1
Local HMI
GUID-DA949D6F-070D-4D84-82AC-6791EF64F84F V1 EN
Figure 7:
Display (LCD)
Buttons
LED indicators
Communication port
51
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
4.5.1.1
Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
GUID-97DA85DD-DB01-449B-AD1F-EEC75A955D25 V1 EN
Figure 8:
Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to
be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with
three dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and
the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears
on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not
fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
52
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
GUID-1ECF507D-322A-4B94-B09C-49F6A0085384 V1 EN
Figure 9:
Truncated path
The number before the function instance, for example 1:ETHFRNT, indicates the
instance number.
The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback
signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required
signal with PCM600.
GUID-11D6D98C-A2C9-4B2C-B5E0-FF7E308EC847 V1 EN
Figure 10:
The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs.
53
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
GUID-D20BB1F1-FDF7-49AD-9980-F91A38B2107D V1 EN
Figure 11:
The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.
4.5.1.2
LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Normal, Pickup and
Trip.
There are also 15 matrix programmable alarm LEDs on front of the LHMI. Each LED
can indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related
to each three-color LED are divided into three pages.The 15 physical three-color LEDs
in one LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be
indicated since there are three LED groups. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600
and the operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.
There are two additional LEDs which are embedded into the control buttons
. They represent the status of the circuit breaker.
4.5.1.3
and
Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views
or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications,
provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.
54
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
GUID-23A12958-F9A5-4BF1-A31B-F69F56A046C7 V2 EN
Figure 12:
LHMI keypad
55
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
GUID-4DE7B578-B9D1-41C6-A023-B5488EC1ECCE V1 EN
Figure 13:
LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command pushbuttons and RJ-45 communication port
Close
Open
Escape
Left
10
Down
11
Up
12
Right
13
Key
14
Enter
15
Remote/Local
16
Uplink LED
17
Not in use
18
Multipage
19
Menu
20
Clear
56
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
21
Help
22
Communication port
4.5.2
LED
4.5.2.1
Functionality
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx
(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The
input signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is
controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, that controls the color and the operating
mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in six different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.
4.5.2.2
Status LEDs
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow and
red.
The green LED has a fixed function, while the yellow and red LEDs are user
configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that a disturbance report is created
(steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The red LED can be used to indicate
a trip command.
4.5.2.3
Indication LEDs
Operating modes
Collecting mode
Re-starting mode
57
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined
for re- starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will
initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a
settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum
time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications
will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function is
not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting
58
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F =
Flash.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence
diagrams below.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:
= No indication
G=
Green
= Steady light
Y=
= Flash
R=
Yellow
Red
IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN
Figure 14:
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals.
It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other
LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN
Figure 15:
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is
as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in
parallel is shown in Figure 16.
59
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN
Figure 16:
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the
indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal
is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a
steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Figure 17:
60
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN
Figure 18:
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 19.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN
Figure 19:
61
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN
Figure 20:
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.
Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of
the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN
Figure 21:
62
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to
Figure 22.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN
Figure 22:
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive
edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its
operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6
Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
63
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 23:
Figure 24 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
64
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN
Figure 24:
Figure 25 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
65
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Figure 25:
66
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN
Figure 26:
4.5.3
Function keys
4.5.3.1
Functionality
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left
of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each
button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control
a binary signal.
4.5.3.2
Operation principle
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled
from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output
status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be
used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O
outputs etc.
67
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.
Mode 0 (OFF)
This mode always gives the output the value 0 (FALSE). Changes on the IO attribute
are ignored.
Input value
Output value
IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN
Figure 27:
Mode 1 (TOGGLE)
In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input has
been written. Note that the input attribute is reset each time the function block
executes. The function block execution is marked with a dotted line below.
Input value
Output value
IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN
Figure 28:
Mode 2 (PULSED)
In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this time
the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects
it being high and there is no output pulse.
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is
zero; else the trigger edge is lost.
68
Technical Manual
Section 4
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Input value
Output value
tpulse
tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN
Figure 29:
Input function
All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function
button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off.
There is an exception for the optional extension EXT1 function keys 7 and 8, since
they are tri-color (they can be red, yellow or green). Each of these LEDs are controlled
by three inputs, which are prioritized in the following order: Red - Yellow - Green
RED
INPUT
YELLOW
GREEN
OUTPUT
Function key LED color
0/1
0/1
red
0/1
yellow
green
off
69
Technical Manual
70
Section 5
Differential protection
Section 5
Differential protection
5.1
5.1.1
Functionality
The Transformer differential protection, two-winding (T2WPDIF, 87T) and
Transformer differential protection, three-winding (T3WPDIF, 87T) are provided with
internal CT ratio matching and phase shift compensation. In addition, zero sequence
elimination is also provided.
The function can be provided with two or three three-phase sets of current inputs. All
current inputs are provided with percentage bias restraint features, making the IED
suitable for two- or three-winding transformer arrangements.
Two-winding applications
352
152
xx05000048_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000048 V1 EN
Three-winding applications
Table continues on next page
71
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
452
152
352
xx05000052_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000052 V1 EN
152
352
xx05000049_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000049 V1 EN
Figure 30:
CT group
arrangement for
differential protection
and other protections
The available settings of this function allow the REG650 to cover various differential
protection applications such as power transformers and auto-transformers with or
without load tap changer as well as for shunt reactors including local feeders within the
station. An adaptive stabilizing feature is included to avoid misoperations during for
heavy through-faults.
Harmonic restraint is included for inrush currents as well as for overexcitation
conditions. Adaptive harmonic restraint is also included for system recovery inrush and
CT saturation during external faults. A high set unrestrained differential current
protection element is included for a very high speed tripping at a high internal fault
currents.
An innovative sensitive differential protection feature, based on the theory of
symmetrical components, offers the best possible coverage for power transformer
winding turn-to-turn faults.
72
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
T3WPDIF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87T
3Id/I
SYMBOL-BB V1 EN
5.1.2.2
Function block
T3WPDIF (87T)
I3PW1CT1*
TRIP
I3PW2CT1*
TRIPRES
I3PW3CT1*
TRIPUNRE
BLOCK
TRNSUNR
TRNSSENS
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
BLK2H
BLK5H
BLKWAV
IDALARM
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IBIAS
IDMAG_NS
ANSI09000269-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000269 V1 EN
Figure 31:
5.1.2.3
Signals
Table 16:
Name
Default
Description
I3PW1CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW2CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PW3CT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
73
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Table 17:
Name
5.1.2.4
Table 18:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN
TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
BLK2H
BOOLEAN
BLK5H
BOOLEAN
BLKWAV
BOOLEAN
IDALARM
BOOLEAN
IDMAG_A
REAL
IDMAG_B
REAL
IDMAG_C
REAL
IBIAS
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Settings
T3WPDIF (87T) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IdMin
0.10 - 0.60
IB
0.01
0.30
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
Section 5
Differential protection
Name
Unit
Step
Default
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00
I2/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
15.0
I5/I1Ratio
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
CrossBlockEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
NegSeqDiffEn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.20
IB
0.01
0.04
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 90.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
SOTFMode
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
IDiffAlarm
0.05 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.20
tAlarmDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
10.000
Table 19:
Values (Range)
Description
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSelW1
1-6
GlobalBaseSelW2
1-6
GlobalBaseSelW3
1-6
ConnectTypeW1
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW2
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
WYE (Y)
ConnectTypeW3
WYE (Y)
Delta (D)
Delta (D)
ClockNumberW2
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
0 [0 deg]
75
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ClockNumberW3
0 [0 deg]
1 [30 deg lag]
2 [60 deg lag]
3 [90 deg lag]
4 [120 deg lag]
5 [150 deg lag]
6 [180 deg]
7 [150 deg lead]
8 [120 deg lead]
9 [90 deg lead]
10 [60 deg lead]
11 [30 deg lead]
ZSCurrSubtrW1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ZSCurrSubtrW2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ZSCurrSubtrW3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
5.1.2.5
Monitored data
Table 20:
Name
5.1.3
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IDMAG_A
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase A
IDMAG_B
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase B
IDMAG_C
REAL
Magnitude of fundamental
frequency differential current,
phase C
IBIAS
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
Operation principle
The task of the power transformer differential protection is to determine whether a
fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is
delimited by the position of current transformers (see figure 32), and in principle can
include more objects than just transformer. If the fault is found to be internal, the faulty
power transformer must be quickly disconnected.
76
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
The main CTs are normally supposed to be Wye connected. The main CTs can be
grounded in anyway (that is, either "ToObject" or "FromObject"). However internally
the differential function will always use reference directions towards the protected
transformer as shown in figure 32. Thus the IED will always internally measure the
currents on all sides of the power transformer with the same reference direction
towards the power transformer windings as shown in figure 32.
IW1
E1S1
IW2
Z1S1
Z1S2
IW1
IW2
E1S2
IED
en05000186_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000186 V1 EN
Figure 32:
Even in a healthy power transformer, the currents are generally not equal when they
flow through the power transformer, due to the ratio of the number of turns of the
windings and the connection group of the protected transformer. Therefore the
differential protection must first correlate all currents to each other before any
calculation can be performed.
In numerical differential protections this correlation and comparison is performed
mathematically. First, compensation for the protected transformer transformation ratio
and connection group is made, and only then the currents are compared phase-wise.
This makes the external auxiliary (that is, interposing) current transformers
unnecessary. Conversion of all currents to the common reference side of the power
transformer is performed by pre-programmed coefficient matrices, which depends on
the protected power transformer transformation ratio and connection group. Once the
power transformer phase shift, rated currents and voltages has been entered by the user,
the differential protection is capable to calculate off-line matrix coefficients required in
order to perform the on-line current comparison by means of a fixed equation.
5.1.3.1
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
protection under through fault conditions while still permitting the system to have good
basic sensitivity. The following chapters explain how these quantities are calculated.
5.1.3.2
all current phasors are phase-shifted to (referred to) the phase-reference side,
(whenever possible a first winding with wye connection)
all currents magnitudes are always referred to the first winding of the power
transformer (typically transformer high-voltage side)
The two steps of conversion are made simultaneously on-line by the pre-programmed
coefficient matrices, as shown in equation 1 for a two-winding power transformer, and
in equation 2 for a three-winding power transformer.
These are internal compensation within the differential function. The
protected power transformer data are always entered as they are given
on the nameplate. Differential function will by it self correlate
nameplate data and select proper reference windings.
IDA
I _ A _ W 1
I _ A _ W 2
IDB = A I _ B _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 B I _ B _ W 2
Vn _ W 1
IDC
I _ C _ W 1
I _ C _ W 2
1
EQUATION1879 V1 EN
(Equation 1)
where:
1.
is Differential Currents
2.
3.
78
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
IDA
I _ A _ W 1
I _ A _ W 2
IL _ A _ W 3
IDB = A I _ B _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 B I _ B _ W 2 + Vn _ W 3 C IL _ B _ W 3
Vn _ W 1
Vn _ W 1
IDC
I _ C _ W 1
I _ C _ W 2
IL _ C _ W 3
1
EQUATION1882-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 2)
where:
1.
is Differential Currents
2.
3.
4.
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseA (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_C
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phaseC (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1
I_B_W1
I_C_W1
I_A_W2
I_B_W2
I_C_W2
I_A_W3
I_B_W3
I_C_W3
Vn_W1
Vn_W2
Vn_W3
A, B & C
Power transformer winding connection type, such as wye (Y/y) or delta (D/d)
79
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
3.
Transformer phase shift such as Yd1, Dy11, YNautod5, Yy0d5 and so on, which
introduce phase displacement between individual windings currents in multiples of
30. Since the HV and LV winding voltages are in phase for wye/wye or Delta/
Delta transformers, the same is represented in IEC as represented as Dd0, Yy0.
Polarity reversal in one of the windings would give 180 degree phase displacement
which can be represented by clock position 6. Such transformers can thus be
represented as Dd6, Yy6. It is also possible to rename the phases ABC to BCA,
giving 120 or 240 degree displacements, represented by clock positions 4 & 8 .
Polarity reversals in one of the windings would provide clock positions 10 & 2.
These can all be represented for example: Yy0, Yy2, Yy4, Dd0, Dd6. ANSI wye/
Delta or Delta/wye transformers have the HV winding leading the LV winding by
30degrees. This can be represented by Yd1 or Dy1. Again considering polarity
reversals and renaming of phases gives rise to other clock positions 4,7,5,11
Settings for elimination of zero sequence currents for individual windings.
When the end user enters all these parameters, transformer differential function
automatically calculates off-line the matrix coefficients. During this calculations the
following rules are used:
For the phase reference, the first winding with set wye (Y) connection is always used.
For example, if the power transformer is a Yd1 power transformer, the HV winding
(Y) is taken as the phase reference winding. If the power transformer is a Dy1, then the
LV winding (y) is taken for the phase reference. If there is no wye connected winding,
such as in Dd0 type of power transformers, then the HV delta winding (D) is
automatically chosen as the phase reference winding.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are in general composed of currents of
all sequences, that is, the positive-, the negative-, and the zero-sequence currents. If the
zero-sequence currents are eliminated (see section "Elimination of zero sequence
currents"), then the differential currents can consist only of the positive-, and the negativesequence currents. When the zero-sequence current is subtracted on one power
transformer side, then it is subtracted from each individual phase current.
As it can be seen from equation 1 and equation 2 the first entered winding (W1) is
always taken for ampere level reference (current magnitudes from all other sides are
always transferred to W1 side). In other words, within the differential protection
function, all differential currents and bias current are always expressed in HV side
primary Amperes.
It can be shown that the values of the matrix A, B & C coefficients (see equation 1 and
equation 2) can be in advanced pre-calculated depending on the relative phase shift
between the reference winding and other power transformer windings.
80
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Table 21 summarizes the values of the matrices for all standard phase shifts between
windings.
Table 21:
2 -1 -1
1
-1 2 -1
3
-1 -1 2
1 -1 0
0 1 -1
3
-1 0 1
1
1
1
3
-2
-2
1
1
-2
1
(Equation 6)
0 -1 1
1 0 -1
3
-1 1 0
-1 -1 2
1
2 -1 -1
3
-1 2 -1
-1 0 1
1 -1 0
3
0 1 -1
EQUATION1235 V1 EN
-2
1
1
3
1
(Equation 7)
EQUATION1234 V1 EN
(Equation 10)
(Equation 11)
-2
-2
EQUATION1236 V1 EN
EQUATION1231 V1 EN
0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
(Equation 9)
EQUATION1233 V1 EN
(Equation 8)
EQUATION1232 V1 EN
(Equation 4)
0 -1 0
0 0 -1
-1 0 0
EQUATION1230 V1 EN
EQUATION1228 V1 EN
(Equation 5)
EQUATION1229 V1 EN
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
(Equation 3)
EQUATION1227 V1 EN
(Equation 12)
-1 0 0
0 -1 0
0 0 -1
EQUATION1237 V1 EN
(Equation 13)
81
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
-1 1 0
0 -1 1
3
1 0 -1
EQUATION1238 V1 EN
1
1
-2
3
1
1
1
-2
EQUATION1242 V1 EN
(Equation 15)
0 1 -1
1
-1 0 1
3
1 -1 0
EQUATION1241 V1 EN
0 1 0
0 0 1
1 0 0
EQUATION1240 V1 EN
(Equation 16)
(Equation 17)
-2
1
1
(Equation 18)
1 0 -1
-1 1 0
3
0 -1 1
EQUATION1244 V1 EN
(Equation 14)
-1 2 -1
1
-1 -1 2
3
2 -1 -1
EQUATION1239 V1 EN
0 0 -1
-1 0 0
0 -1 0
EQUATION1243 V1 EN
(Equation 19)
(Equation 20)
HV winding will be used as reference winding and zero sequence currents shall be
subtracted on that side
LV winding is lagging for 150
With help of table 21, the following matrix equation can be written for this power
transformer:
82
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
ID _ A
2 -1 -1 I _ A _ W 1
-1 0 1 I _ A _ W 2
ID _ B = 1 -1 2 -1 I _ B _ W 1 + Vr _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 I _ B _ W 2
3
Vr _ W 1 3
-1 -1 2 I _ C _ W 1
ID _ C
0 1 -1 I _ C _ W 2
EQUATION1810-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 21)
where:
ID_A
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase A (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_B
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase B (in W1 side primary amperes)
ID_C
is the fundamental frequency differential current in phase C (in W1 side primary amperes)
I_A_W1
I_B_W1
I_C_W1
I_A_W2
I_B_W2
I_C_W2
Vn_W1
Vn_W2
As marked in equation 1 and equation 2, the first term on the right hand side of the
equation, represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from W1
side to the fundamental frequency differential currents compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift. The second term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution from the individual phase currents from W2 side to the
fundamental frequency differential currents compensated for eventual power
transformer phase shift and transferred to the power transformer W1 side. The third
term on the right hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution from the
individual phase currents from W3 side to the fundamental frequency differential
currents compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and transferred to the
power transformer W1 side. These current contributions are important, because they
are used for calculation of common bias current.
The fundamental frequency differential currents are the "usual" differential currents,
the magnitudes of which are applied in a phase-wise manner to the operate - restrain
characteristic of the differential protection. The magnitudes of the differential currents
can be read as service values from the function and they are available as outputs
IDMAG_A, IDMAG_B, IDMAG_C from the differential protection function block.
Thus they can be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded
during any external or internal fault condition.
83
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.1.3.3
5.1.3.4
Bias current
The bias current is calculated as the highest current amongst individual winding current
contributions to the total fundamental frequency differential currents. All individual
winding current contributions are already referred to the power transformer winding
one side (power transformer HV winding) and therefore they can be compared
regarding their magnitudes. There are six (or nine in case of three-winding
transformer) contributions to the total fundamental differential currents, which are the
candidates for the common bias current. The highest individual current contribution is
taken as a common bias (restrain) current for all three phases. This "maximum
principle" makes the differential protection more secure, with less risk to operate for
external faults and in the same time brings more meaning to the breakpoint settings of
the operate - restrain characteristic.
The magnitudes of the common bias (restrain) current expressed in the HV side
Amperes can be read as service values from the function. At the same time it is
available as outputs IBIAS from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can
be connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any
external or internal fault condition.
5.1.3.5
the protected power transformer cannot transform the zero sequence currents to the
other side, for any reason.
the zero sequence currents can only flow on one side of the protected power
transformer.
In most cases, power transformers do not properly transform the zero sequence current
to the other side. A typical example is a power transformer of the wye-delta type, for
84
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
example YNd1. Transformers of this type do not transform the zero sequence
quantities, but zero sequence currents can flow in the grounded wye connected
winding. In such cases, an external ground-fault on the wye-side causes the zero
sequence currents to flow on the wye-side of the power transformer, but not on the
other side. This results in false differential currents - consisting exclusively of the zero
sequence currents. If high enough, these false differential currents can cause an
unwanted disconnection of the healthy power transformer. They must therefore be
subtracted from the fundamental frequency differential currents if an unwanted trip is
to be avoided.
For delta windings this feature shall be enabled only if an grounding transformer exist
within differential zone on the delta side of the protected power transformer.
Removing the zero sequence current from the differential currents decreases to some
extent sensitivity of the differential protection for internal ground-faults. In order to
counteract this effect to some degree, the zero sequence currents are subtracted not
only from the three fundamental frequency differential currents, but automatically from
the bias current as well.
5.1.3.6
85
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
IdMin (Sensitivity in section 1, multiple of trans. HV side rated current set under
the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
EndSection1 (End of section 1, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
EndSection2 (End of section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
SlopeSection2 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
SlopeSection3 (Slope in section 2, as multiple of transformer HV side rated current
set under the parameter IBase in GlobalbaseSelW1)
IdMin
EndSection1
EndSection2
SlopeSection2
SlopeSection3
86
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate
conditionally
2
Section 1
Section 2
Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
IdMin
SlopeSection2
Restrain
0
0
EndSection1
EndSection2
restrain current
[ times IBase ]
en05000187-2.vsd
IEC05000187 V2 EN
Figure 33:
where:
The operate - restrain characteristic is tailor-made and can be designed freely by the
user after his needs. The default characteristic is recommended to be used. It gives
good results in a majority of applications. The operate - restrain characteristic has in
principle three sections with a section-wise proportionality of the operate value to the
bias (restrain) current. The reset ratio is in all parts of the characteristic is equal to 0.95.
Section 1: This is the most sensitive part on the characteristic. In section 1, normal
currents flow through the protected circuit and its current transformers, and risk for
higher false differential currents is relatively low. Un-compensated on-load tap-
87
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
changer is a typical reason for existence of the false differential currents in this section.
Slope in section 1 is always zero percent.
Section 2: In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope
with false differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the
current transformers.
Section 3: The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher
tolerance to substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents,
which may be expected in this section.
The operate - restrain characteristic should be designed so that it can be expected that:
5.1.3.7
for internal faults, the operate (differential) currents are always safely, that is, with
a good margin, above the operate - restrain characteristic
for external faults, the false (spurious) operate currents are safely, that is, with a
good margin, below the operate - restrain characteristic
88
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
IDNS _ A
2 -1 -1 INS _ W 1
-1 0 1 INS _ W 2
IDNS _ B = 1 -1 2 -1 a INS _ W 1 + Vn _ W 2 1 1 -1 0 a INS _ W 2
Vn _ W 1
3
3
IDNS _ C
-1 -1 2 a 2 INS _ W 1
0 1 -1 a 2 INS _ W 2
1
3
(Equation 23)
EQUATION1560 V1 EN
where:
1.
2.
3.
and where:
IDNS_A
IDNS_B
IDNS_C
INS_W1
INS_W2
Vn_W1
Vn_W2
a=e
j 120
=-
EQUATION1248 V1 EN
1
2
+ j
3
2
(Equation 24)
Because the negative sequence currents always form the symmetrical three phase
current system on each transformer side (that is, negative sequence currents in every
phase will always have the same magnitude and be phase displaced for 120 electrical
degrees from each other), it is only necessary to calculate the first negative sequence
differential current that is, IDNS_A.
89
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
As marked in equation 23, the first term on the right hand side of the equation,
represents the total contribution of the negative sequence current from W1 side
compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift. The second term on the right
hand side of the equation, represents the total contribution of the negative sequence
current from W2 side compensated for eventual power transformer phase shift and
transferred to the power transformer W1 side. These negative sequence current
contributions are phasors, which are further used in directional comparisons, made in
order to characterize a fault as internal or external. See section "Internal/external fault
discriminator" for more information.
The magnitudes of the negative sequence differential current expressed in the HV side
A can be read as service values from the function. In the same time it is available as
outputs IDMAG_NS from the differential protection function block. Thus, it can be
connected to the disturbance recorder and automatically recorded during any external
or internal fault condition.
5.1.3.8
(Equation 25)
2.
3.
The internal/external fault discriminator responds to magnitudes and the relative phase
angles of the negative-sequence fault currents at different windings (that is, sides) of
the protected power transformer. The negative sequence fault currents must of course
first be referred to the same phase reference side, and put to the same magnitude
reference. This is done by the matrix expression (see equation 23).
90
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
IMinNegSeq
NegSeqROA
90 deg
120 deg
If one or the
other of
currents is too
low, then no
measurement
is done, and
120 degrees
is mapped
Internal/external
fault boundary
NegSeqROA
(Relay
Operate
Angle)
180 deg
0 deg
IMinNegSeq
External
fault
region
Internal
fault
region
270 deg
en05000188-2-en.vsd
IEC05000188 V2 EN
Figure 34:
In order to perform directional comparison of the two phasors their magnitudes must
be high enough so that one can be sure that they are due to a fault. On the other hand,
in order to guarantee a good sensitivity of the internal/external fault discriminator, the
value of this minimum limit must not be too high. Note that, in order to enhance
stability at higher fault currents, the relatively very low threshold value IminNegSeq is
91
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
dynamically increased at currents higher than normal currents: if the bias current is
higher than 110% IBase current, then 10% of the bias current is added to the
IminNegSeq.Only if magnitudes of both negative sequence current contributions are
above the actual limit, the relative position between these two phasors is checked. If
either of the negative sequence current contributions, which should be compared, is too
small (less than the set value for IminNegSeq), no directional comparison is made in
order to avoid the possibility to produce a wrong decision. The setting NegSeqROA
represents the Relay Operate Angle, which determines the boundary between the
internal and external fault regions. It can be selected in the range from 30 degrees to
90 degrees, with a step of 0.1 degree. The default value is 60 degrees. The default
setting 60 degree favours somewhat security in comparison to dependability.
If the above condition concerning magnitudes is fulfilled, the internal/external fault
discriminator compares the relative phase angle between the negative sequence current
contributions from the W1 and W2 sides of the power transformer using the following
two rules:
For example, for any unsymmetrical external fault, ideally the respective negative
sequence current contributions from the W1 and W2 power transformer sides will be
exactly 180 degrees apart and equal in magnitude, regardless the power transformer
turns ratio and phase displacement. One such example is shown in figure 35, which
shows trajectories of the two separate phasors representing the negative sequence
current contributions from HV and LV sides of an Yd5 power transformer (for
example, after the compensation of the transformer turns ratio and phase displacement
for an unsymmetrical external fault. Observe that the relative phase angle between
these two phasors is 180 electrical degrees at any point in time. No current transformer
saturation was assumed for this case.
92
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
"steady state"
for HV side
neg. seq. phasor
90
60
150
30
10
ms
180
0
0.1 kA
10
ms
0.2 kA
0.3 kA
0.4 kA
330
210
240
270
"steady state"
for LV side
neg. seq. phasor
en05000189.vsd
IEC05000189 V1 EN
Figure 35:
Therefore, under all external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to
180 degrees. During internal fault, the angle shall ideally be 0 degrees, but due to
possible different negative sequence source impedance angles on W1 and W2 sides of
the protected power transformer, it may differ somewhat from the ideal zero value.
However, during heavy faults, CT saturation might cause the measured phase angle to
differ from 180 degrees for external, and from about 0 degrees for internal fault. See
figure 36 for an example of a heavy internal fault with transient CT saturation.
93
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Dire ctiona l Compa ris on Crite rion: Inte rna l fa ult a s s e e n from the HV s ide
90
e xcurs ion
from 0 de gre e s
due to CT
s a tura tion
60
120
35 ms
30
150
de finite ly
a n inte rna l
fa ult
180
e xte rna l
fa ult
re gion
0.5 kA
210
330
trip c o mmand
in 12 ms
Inte rna l fa ult
de cla re d 7 ms
a fte r inte rna l
fa ult occure d
1.0 kA
240
300
270
1.5 kA
HV s ide contribution to the tota l ne ga tive s e que nce diffe re ntia l curre nt in kA
Dire ctiona l limit (within the re gion de limite d by 60 de gre e s is inte rna l fa ult)
en05000190.vsd
IEC05000190 V1 EN
Figure 36:
However, it shall be noted that additional security measures are implemented in the
internal/external fault discriminator algorithm in order to guaranty proper operation
with heavily saturated current transformers. The trustworthy information on whether a
fault is internal or external is typically obtained in about 10ms after the fault inception,
depending on the setting IminNegSeq, and the magnitudes of the fault currents. At
heavy faults, approximately 5ms time to full saturation of the main CT is sufficient in
order to produce a correct discrimination between internal and external faults.
5.1.3.9
If one or more pickup signals have been set by the traditional differential protection
algorithm, because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents
entered the operate region on the operate - restrain characteristic then the unrestrained
94
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
negative sequence protection is activated. So, this protection is not independent of the
traditional restrained differential protection - it is activated after the first start signal
has been placed.
If the same fault has been positively recognized as internal, then the unrestrained
negative sequence differential protection places its own trip request.
If the bias current is higher than 110% IBase of the power transformer winding W1,
then any block signals by the harmonic and/or waveform criteria, which can block the
traditional differential protection are overridden, and the differential protection
operates quickly without any further delay. If the bias current is lower than 110%,
where harmonic block should not exist for internal faults, then this negative sequence
differential protection is restrained by any harmonic block signal.
This logic guarantees a fast disconnection of a faulty power transformer for any
heavier internal faults.
If the same fault has been classified as external, then generally, but not
unconditionally, a trip command is prevented. If a fault is classified as external, the
further analysis of the fault conditions is initiated. If all the instantaneous differential
currents in phases where pickup signals have been issued are free of harmonic
pollution, then a (minor) internal fault, simultaneous with a predominant external fault
can be suspected. This conclusion can be drawn because at external faults, major false
differential currents can only exist when one or more current transformers saturate. In
this case, the false instantaneous differential currents are polluted by higher harmonic
components, the 2nd, the 5th etc.
The sensitive, negative sequence current based turn-to-turn fault protection detects the
low level faults, which are not detected by the traditional differential protection until
they develop into more severe faults, including power transformer iron core. The
sensitive protection is independent from the traditional differential protection and is a
very good complement to it. The essential part of this sensitive protection is the internal/
external fault discriminator. In order to be activated, the sensitive protection requires
no pickup signal from the traditional power transformer biased differential protection.
If magnitudes of HV and LV negative sequence current contributions are above the set
limit for IminNegSeq, then their relative positions are determined. If the disturbance is
characterized as an internal fault, then a separate trip request will be placed. Any
decision on the way to the final trip request must be confirmed several times in
succession in order to cope with eventual CT transients. This causes a short additional
operating time delay due to this security count. For very low level turn-to-turn faults
the overall response time of this protection is about 30ms. The sensitive negative
sequence differential protection is automatically deactivated if the bias current
becomes higher than 150 % IBase. Further, this protection can always be restrained,
that is, prevented from issuing a trip request, by any harmonic block signal. This
95
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
because at rather low fault currents, which are to be detected by this protection,
harmonic pollution is not likely.
5.1.3.10
5.1.3.11
Harmonic restrain
The harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal is to prevent an unwanted trip command
due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, or due to magnetizing
currents at over-voltages.
The magnetizing currents of a power transformer flow only on one side of the power
transformer (one or the other) and are therefore always the cause of false differential
currents. The harmonic analysis (the 2nd and the 5th harmonic) is applied to
instantaneous differential currents. Typically instantaneous differential currents during
power transformer energizing are shown in figure 37. The harmonic analysis is only
applied in those phases, where pickup signals have been set. For example, if the
content of the 2nd harmonic in the instantaneous differential current of phase A is
above the setting I2/I1Ratio, then a block signal is set for that phase.
Waveform restrain
The waveform restrain criterion is a good complement to the harmonic analysis. The
waveform restrain is a pattern recognition algorithm, which looks for intervals within
each fundamental power system cycle with low instantaneous differential current. This
interval is often called current gap in protection literature. However, within differential
function this criterion actually searches for long-lasting intervals with low rate-ofchange in instantaneous differential current, which are typical for the power
transformer inrush currents. Block signal BLKWAV is set in those phases where such
behavior is detected. The algorithm do not requires any end user settings. The
waveform algorithm is automatically adapted dependent only on the power transformer
rated data.
96
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Current [%]
400kV Currents
I_A
I_B
I_C
Time [cycles]
en05000343_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000343 V1 EN
Figure 37:
Basic definition of the cross-blocking is that one of the three phases can block
operation (that is,tripping) of the other two phases due to the harmonic pollution of the
differential current in that phase (that is, waveform, 2nd or 5th harmonic content). In
differential algorithm the user can control the cross-blocking between the phases via
the setting parameter CrossBlockEn=Enabled.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=Enabled cross blocking between phases is introduced.
There is no time settings involved, but the phase with the operating point above the set
bias characteristic (in the operate region) will be able to cross-block other two phases if
it is itself blocked by any of the previously explained restrained criteria. If the start
signal in this phase is removed, that is, reset from TRUE to FALSE, cross blocking
from that phase will be inhibited. In this way cross-blocking of the temporary nature is
achieved. It should be noted that this is the default (recommended) setting value for
this parameter.
When parameter CrossBlockEn=Disabled, any cross blocking between phases will be
disabled. It is recommended to use the value Disabled with caution in order to avoid
the unwanted tripping during initial energizing of the power transformer.
5.1.3.12
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
When enabled this feature ensures quick differential protection tripping in cases where
a transformer is energized with a more severe (minor faults cannot be discovered)
internal fault (for example, forgotten grounding on transformer LV side for example,
after a regular service). The feature is based on the waveform check. If a severe
internal fault exists, then, when the power transformer is energized, the magnetic
density in the iron core will be low and high sinusoidal currents will flow from the
very beginning. The waveform block algorithm will in such a case remove all its three
block signals in a very short interval of time. A quick reset of the waveblock criterion
will temporarily disable the second harmonic blocking feature within the differential
function. This consequently ensures fast operation of the transformer differential
function for a switch onto a fault condition. It shall be noted that this feature is only
active during initial power transformer energizing, more exactly, under the first 50 ms.
When the switch onto fault feature is disabled by the setting parameter SOTFMode, the
waveblock and second harmonic blocking features work in parallel and are completely
independent from each other.
5.1.3.13
Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for transformer differential protection are shown in the
following figures.
98
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
ID_A
Trafo
Data
Differential function
152
52
ADM
ID_B
ID_C
IDMAG_NS
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
MAX
IBIAS
Figure 38:
Figure 38 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done in case of twowinding transformer.
The following currents are inputs to the power transformer differential protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) A, that is, as
measured.
99
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
1.
2.
3.
Instantaneous values of currents (samples) from HV, and LV sides for twowinding power transformers, and from the HV, the first LV, and the second LV
sides for three-winding power transformers.
Currents from all power transformer sides expressed as fundamental frequency
phasors, with their real, and imaginary parts. These currents are calculated within
the protection function by the fundamental frequency Fourier filters.
Negative sequence currents from all power transformer sides expressed as phasors.
These currents are calculated within the protection function by the symmetrical
components module.
2.
3.
100
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
BLKUNRES
a
IdUnre
AND
b>a
TRIPUNRE_A
IDMAG_A
IBIAS
PU_A
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
AND
OR
IDA
NOT
2nd
Harmonic
BLK2H_A
5th
Harmonic
BLK5H_A
BLKWAV_A
Wave
block
Cross Block
from B or C phases
CrossBlockEn=Enabled
TRIPRES_A
AND
OR
AND
Cross Block
to B or C phases
ANSI05000168_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000168 V2 EN
Figure 39:
101
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Internal/
External
Fault
discrimin
ator
Neg.Seq. Diff
Current
Contributions
EXTFAULT
INTFAULT
Constant
TRNSSENS
AND
TRNSUNR
AND
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
t
0
b>a
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
en05000167_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000167 V1 EN
Figure 40:
TRIPRES_A
TRIPRES_B
TRIPRES_C
OR
TRIPRES
OR
TRIPUNRE
TRIPUNRE_A
TRIPUNRE_B
TRIPUNRE_C
TRNSSENS
OR
TRIP
TRNSUNR
en05000278_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000278 V1 EN
Figure 41:
102
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
PICKUP
OR
BLK2H
OR
BLK5H
OR
BLKWAV
BLK2H_A
BLK2H_B
BLK2H_C
BLK5H_A
BLK5H_B
BLK5H_C
BLKWAV_A
BLKWAV_B
BLKWAV_C
en05000279_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000279 V1 EN
Figure 42:
2.
3.
4.
103
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.
6.
common trip TRIP are issued. This feature is called the sensitive negative
sequence differential protection.
If a pickup signal is issued in a phase (see signal PU_A), even if the fault has been
classified as an external fault, then the instantaneous differential current of that
phase (see signal ID_A) is analyzed for the 2nd and the 5th harmonic contents (see
the blocks with the text inside: 2nd Harmonic; Wave block and 5th Harmonic). If
there is less harmonic pollution, than allowed by the settings I2/I1Ratio, and I5/
I1Ratio, (then the outputs from the blocks 2nd harmonic and 5th harmonic is 0)
then it is assumed that a minor simultaneous internal fault must have occurred.
Only under these conditions a trip command is allowed (the signal TRIPRES_A is
= 1). The cross-block logic scheme is automatically applied under such
circumstances. (This means that the cross block signals from the other two phases
B and C is not activated to obtain a trip on the TRIPRES_A output signal in figure
39)
All pickup and blocking conditions are available as phase segregated as well as
common (that is three-phase) signals.
IDMAG_A Diff
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm
IDMAG_B Diff
tAlarm Delay
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm
IDMAG_C Diff
&
IDALARM
a
a>b
I Diff Alarm
ANSI06000546-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000546 V1 EN
Figure 43:
104
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.1.4
Technical data
Table 22:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operating characteristic
Adaptable
Reset ratio
>94%
(1.00-50.00)xIBase on
high voltage winding
1.0% of In
1.0% of In
1.0 degrees
(5.0-100.0)% of
fundamental differential
current
2.0% of In
(5.0-100.0)% of
fundamental differential
current
12.0% of In
Wye or delta
011
25 ms typically at 0 to
5 x Ib
25 ms typically at 5 to
0 x Ib
20 ms typically at 0 to
5 x Ib
25 ms typically at 5 to
0 x Ib
5.2
5.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
HZPDIF
IEC 60617
identification
Id
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
SYMBOL-CC V2 EN
105
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.2.2
Introduction
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function can be used
when the involved CTs have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external summation of the currents in the interconnected
CTs, a series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are mounted externally
connected to the IED.
HZPDIF (87) can be used as high impedance REF protection.
5.2.3
Function block
HZPDIF (87)
ISI*
BLOCK
BLKTR
TRIP
ALARM
MEASVOLT
ANSI05000363-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000363 V2 EN
Figure 44:
5.2.4
Signals
Table 23:
Name
Default
Description
ISI
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
Table 24:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
MEASVOLT
REAL
106
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.2.5
Table 25:
Name
Settings
HZPDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
AlarmPickup
2 - 500
10
tAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TripPickup
5 - 900
100
R series
10 - 20000
ohm
1800
5.2.6
Monitored data
Table 26:
Name
MEASVOLT
5.2.7
Type
REAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
kV
Description
Measured RMS voltage on
CT secondary side
Operation principle
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function is based on
one current input with external stabilizing resistors and voltage dependent resistors.
The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the function operating value V
TripPickup calculated to achieve through fault stability. The used stabilizing resistor
value is set by the setting R series.
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.
5.2.7.1
Logic diagram
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF (87), see figure 45. It is a simple one step
function with an additional lower alarm level. By activating inputs, the HZPDIF (87)
function can either be blocked completely, or only the trip output.
107
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
AlarmPickup
0-tAlarm
0
AlarmPickup
0.03s
0
en05000301_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000301 V1 EN
Figure 45:
5.2.8
Technical data
Table 27:
Function
5.3
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate voltage
(20-400) V
I=V/R
1.0% of In
Reset ratio
>95%
Maximum continuous
voltage
Operate time
15 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd
Reset time
90 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Vd
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd
108
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.3.1
Identification
Function description
Generator differential protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GENPDIF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87G
Id>
SYMBOL-NN V1 EN
5.3.2
Functionality
Short circuit between the phases of the stator windings causes normally very large fault
currents. The short circuit gives risk of damages on insulation, windings and stator iron
core. The large short circuit currents cause large forces, which can cause damage even
to other components in the power plant, such as turbine and generator-turbine shaft.
The task of Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) is to determine whether
a fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. If the fault is
internal, the faulty generator must be quickly tripped, that is, disconnected from the
network, the field breaker tripped and the power to the prime mover interrupted.
To limit the damage due to stator winding short circuits, the fault clearance must be as
fast as possible (instantaneous). If the generator block is connected to the power system
close to other generating blocks, the fast fault clearance is essential to maintain the
transient stability of the non-faulted generators.
Normally, the short circuit fault current is very large, that is, significantly larger than
the generator rated current. There is a risk that a short circuit can occur between phases
close to the neutral point of the generator, thus causing a relatively small fault current.
The fault current can also be limited due to low excitation of the generator. Therefore,
it is desired that the detection of generator phase-to-phase short circuits shall be
relatively sensitive, detecting small fault currents.
It is also of great importance that the generator differential protection does not trip for
external faults, with large fault currents flowing from the generator. To combine fast
fault clearance, as well as sensitivity and selectivity, the generator differential
protection is normally the best choice for phase-to-phase generator short circuits. A
negative-sequence-current-based internal-external fault discriminator can also be used
to determine whether a fault is internal or external. The internal-external fault
discriminator not only positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but
can independently detect minor faults which may not be felt (until they develop into
more serious faults) by the "usual" differential protection based on operate-restrain
characteristic.
109
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.3.3
Function block
GENPDIF (87G)
I3PNCT*
TRIP
I3PTCT*
TRIPRES
BLOCK
TRIPUNRE
BLKRES
TRNSUNR
BLKUNRES
TRNSSENS
BLKNSUNR
PICKUP
BLKNSSEN
BLKH
DESENSIT
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
IDMAG_A
IDMAG_B
IDMAG_C
IDMAG_NS
IBIAS
ANSI07000025-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000025 V3 EN
Figure 46:
5.3.4
Signals
Table 28:
Name
Default
Description
I3PNCT
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PTCT
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKRES
BOOLEAN
BLKUNRES
BOOLEAN
BLKNSUNR
BOOLEAN
BLKNSSEN
BOOLEAN
DESENSIT
BOOLEAN
110
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Table 29:
Name
5.3.5
Table 30:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPRES
BOOLEAN
TRIPUNRE
BOOLEAN
TRNSUNR
BOOLEAN
TRNSSENS
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
BLKH
BOOLEAN
OPENCT
BOOLEAN
OPENCTAL
BOOLEAN
IDMAG_A
REAL
IDMAG_B
REAL
IDMAG_C
REAL
IDMAG_NS
REAL
IBIAS
REAL
Settings
GENPDIF (87G) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IdMin
0.10 - 1.00
IB
0.01
0.25
IdUnre
1.00 - 50.00
IB
0.01
10.00
OpNegSeqDiff
No
Yes
Yes
IMinNegSeq
0.02 - 0.40
IB
0.01
0.10
111
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Table 31:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EndSection1
0.20 - 1.50
IB
0.01
1.25
EndSection2
1.00 - 10.00
IB
0.01
3.00
SlopeSection2
10.0 - 50.0
0.1
40.0
SlopeSection3
30.0 - 100.0
0.1
80.0
NegSeqROA
30.0 - 120.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
HarmDistLimit
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
10.0
OpCrossBlock
No
Yes
Yes
AddTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
OperDCBiasing
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpenCTEnable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tOCTAlarmDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
1.000
tOCTResetDelay
0.100 - 10.000
0.001
0.250
tOCTUnrstDelay
0.100 - 100.000
0.001
10.000
TempIdMin
1.0 - 5.0
IdMin
0.1
2.0
Table 32:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
5.3.6
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
The task of Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) is to determine whether
a fault is within the protected zone, or outside the protected zone. The protected zone is
delimited by the position of current transformers, as shown in figure 47.
112
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
IEC06000430-2-en.vsd
IEC06000430 V2 EN
Figure 47:
If the fault is internal, the faulty generator must be quickly tripped, that is,
disconnected from the network, the field breaker tripped and the power to the prime
mover interrupted.
GENPDIF (87G) function always uses reference (default) directions of CTs towards
the protected generator as shown in figure 47. Thus, it always measures the currents on
the two sides of the generator with the same reference direction towards the generator
windings. With the orientation of CTs as in figure 47, the difference of currents
flowing in, and out, of a separate stator winding phase is simply obtained by
summation of the two currents fed to the differential protection function.
Numerical IEDs have brought a large number of advantages and new functionality to
the protective relaying. One of the benefits is the simplicity and accuracy of calculating
symmetrical components from individual phase quantities. Within the firmware of a
numerical IED, it is no more difficult to calculate negative-sequence components than
it is to calculate zero-sequence components. Diversity of operation principles
integrated in the same protection function enhances the overall performance without a
significant increase in cost.
A novelty in GENPDIF (87G), namely the negative-sequence-current-based internalexternal fault discriminator, is used with advantage in order to determine whether a
fault is internal or external. Indeed, the internal-external fault discriminator not only
positively discriminates between internal and external faults, but can independently
detect minor faults which may not be felt (until they develop into more serious faults)
by the "usual" differential protection based on operate-restrain characteristic.
GENPDIF (87G) is using fundamental frequency phase current phasors and negative
sequence current phasors. These quantities are derived outside the differential
protection function block, in the general pre-processing blocks. GENPDIF (87G) is
also using with advantage the DC component of the instantaneous differential current
and the 2nd and 5th harmonic components of the instantaneous differential currents. The
instantaneous differential currents are calculated from the input samples of the
instantaneous values of the currents measured at both ends of the stator winding. The
DC and the 2nd and 5th harmonic components of each separate instantaneous
differential current are extracted inside the differential protection.
113
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.3.6.1
5.3.6.2
(Equation 26)
One common fundamental frequency bias current is used. The bias current is the
magnitude of the highest measured current in the protected circuit. The bias current is
not allowed to drop instantaneously, instead, it decays exponentially with a predefined
time constant. These principles make the differential IED more secure, with less risk to
operate for external faults. The maximum principle brings as well more meaning to
the breakpoint settings of the operate-restrain characteristic.
(Equation 27)
114
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
IAn
IAt
Idiff
IAt
IAn
ANSI0700018_3_en.vsd
ANSI07000018 V3 EN
Figure 48:
Internal fault
IAn
IAt
IAt
IAn
Idiff = 0
en07000019-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000019 V2 EN
Figure 49:
External fault
Section 5
Differential protection
(Equation 28)
Note that both slopes are calculated from the characteristics break points.
116
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
the protected machine at rated load, the restrain, bias current will be around 1 p.u., that
is, equal to the machine rated current.
In section 2, a certain minor slope is introduced which is supposed to cope with false
differential currents proportional to higher than normal currents through the current
transformers.
The more pronounced slope in section 3 is designed to result in a higher tolerance to
substantial current transformer saturation at high through-fault currents, which can be
expected in this section.
Note that both slopes are calculated from the characteristics break points.
117
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
operate current
[ times IBase ]
Operate
unconditionally
UnrestrainedLimit
Operate
conditionally
2
Section 1
TempIdMin
IdMin
Section 2
Section 3
SlopeSection3
1
SlopeSection2
Restrain
0
0
EndSection1
EndSection2
restrain current
[ times IBase ]
en06000637.vsd
IEC06000637 V2 EN
Figure 51:
Operate-restrain characteristic
118
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.3.6.3
Supplementary criteria
To relieve the burden of constructing an exact optimal operate-restrain characteristic,
two special features supplement the basic stabilized differential protection function,
making Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G) a very reliable one.
The supplementary criteria are:
Section 5
Differential protection
sequence system, faults can be distinguished as internal or external, even for threephase faults.
The internal or external fault discriminator responds to the relative phase angles of the
negative sequence fault currents at both ends of the stator winding. Observe that the
source of the negative sequence currents at unsymmetrical faults is at the fault point.
If the two negative sequence currents, as seen by the differential relay, flow in the
same direction (that is with the CTs oriented as in figure 47), the fault is internal.
If the two negative sequence currents flow in opposite directions, the fault is external.
Under external fault condition, the relative angle is theoretically equal to 180.
Under internal fault condition, the angle is ideally 0, but due to possible different
negative-sequence impedance angles on both sides of the internal fault, it may
differ somewhat from 0.
The setting NegSeqROA, as shown in figure 52, represents the so called Relay Operate
Angle, which determines the boundary between the internal and external fault regions.
It can be selected in the range 30 to 90, with a step of 1. The default value is
60. The default setting, 60, favors somewhat security in comparison to dependability.
Magnitudes of both negative-sequence currents which are to be compared as to their
phase positions in the complex plane must be high enough so that one can be sure that
they are due to a fault. The limit value IMinNegSeq is settable in the range [0.02
0.20] of the protected generator rated current. Adaptability is introduced if the bias
current is higher than 150 % rated current. Adaptability is introduced 10 ms after this
limit of 150 % rated current has been crossed so that the internal/external discriminator
is given the time to detect correctly a fault before an eventual CT saturation sets in.
The threshold IMinNegSeq is dynamically increased by 4 % of the bias current, in case
of internal faults, and by 8 % of the bias current in case of external faults. Only if
magnitudes of both currents are above the limit IMinNegSeq, the angle between the
two currents is calculated. If any of the two currents is too small, no decision is taken
regarding the relative position of the fault, and this feature then remains inactive rather
than to produce a wrong decision. The relative angle is then assigned the value of 120
(2.094 radians). If this value persists, then this is an indication that no directional
comparison has been made. Neither internal, nor external fault (disturbance) is
declared in this case.
120
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
90 deg
120 deg
NegSeqROA
(Relay Operate Angle)
Internal fault
region
180 deg
0 deg
IminNegSeq
External fault
region
Internal /
external fault
boundary.
Default 60 deg
en06000433-2.vsd
IEC06000433 V2 EN
Figure 52:
If one or more pickup signals have been set by the restrained differential protection
algorithm, because one or more of the fundamental frequency differential currents
entered the operate region of the restrained differential protection, then the internal/
external fault discriminator can enhance the final, common, trip command by the
differential protection. If a fault is classified as internal, then any eventual block
signals by the harmonic criterion are ignored, and the differential protection operates
immediately without any further delay. This makes the overall generator differential
protection very fast. Operation of this protection is signaled on the output of GENPDIF
(87G) as TRNSUNRE.
Section 5
Differential protection
5.3.6.4
Harmonic restrain
Harmonic restrain is the classical restrain method traditionally used with power
transformer differential protections. The goal there was to prevent an unwanted trip
command due to magnetizing inrush currents at switching operations, due to
magnetizing currents at over-voltages, or external faults. Harmonic restrain is just as
useful with Generator differential protection GENPDIF (87G). The harmonic analysis
is only executed in those phases, where pickup signals have been set.
There is no magnetizing inrush to a generator, but there may be some in case of shunt
reactors. The false initial differential currents of a shunt reactor have an appreciable
amount of higher harmonic currents.
At external faults dangerous false differential currents can arise for different reasons,
mainly due to saturation of one or more current transformers. The false differential
currents display in this case a considerable amount of higher harmonics, which can,
therefore, be used to prevent an unwanted trip of a healthy generator or shunt reactor.
If a fault is recognized as external by the internal/external fault discriminator, but
nevertheless one or more pickup signals have been set, the harmonic analysis is
initiated in the phases with pickup signal, as previously described. If all of the
instantaneous differential currents, where trip signals have been set, are free of higher
harmonics (that is the cross-block principle is imposed temporarily), a (minor) internal
fault is assumed to have happened simultaneously with a predominant external one. A
trip command is then allowed.
5.3.6.5
122
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
5.3.6.6
Calculation
Idiff and Ibias
Magnitude
Idiff and Ibias
Diff.prot.
characteristic
TRIP
Signals
Pickup
phase
selective
PICKUP
Signals
BLOCK
Signals
Samples IAN, IBN,ICN
Calculation
instantaneous
Idiff
Samples Idiff
Hamonic
analysis: DC,
2nd and 5th
Harm.
Block
Pickup
and trip
logic
INTFAULT
EXTFAULT
OPENCT
OPENCTAL
Calculation
negative
sequence
Idiff
Internal/
External Fault
Discriminator
and Sensitive
differential
protection
Analog
Outputs
Intern/
extern
Fault
en06000434-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000434 V2 EN
Figure 53:
123
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
BLKUNRES
a
IdUnre
AND
b>a
TRIPUNRE_A
IDMAG_A
IBIAS
ST_A
AND
BLOCK
BLKRES
AND
OR
ID_A
TRIPRES_A
NOT
2nd and
5th
Harmonic
BLK_A
Cross Block
from B or C
AND
Cross Block
To B or C
AND
OpCrossBlock=On
en07000020_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000020 V2 EN
Figure 54:
Internal/
External
Fault
discrimin
ator
Neg.Seq. Diff
Current
Contributions
Constant
INTFAULT
TRNSSENS
AND
OpNegSeqDiff=On
IBIAS
EXTFAULT
b>a
BLKNSSEN
BLKNSUNR
BLOCK
AND
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
TRNSUNR
OR
en07000021_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000021 V2 EN
Figure 55:
124
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
OR
PICKUP
OR
BLKH
BLKH_A
BLKH_B
BLKH_C
en07000022_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000022 V1 EN
Figure 56:
TRIPRES_A
TRIPRES_B
TRIPRES_C
OR
TRIPRES
OR
TRIPUNRE
TRIPUNRE_A
TRIPUNRE_B
TRIPUNRE_C
TRIP
OR
TRNSSENS
TRNSUNR
en07000023_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000023 V1 EN
Figure 57:
5.3.7
Technical data
Table 33:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reset ratio
> 90%
(1-50)p.u. of IBase
(0.051.00)p.u. of
1.0% of In
(0.020.2)p.u. of IBase
1.0% of In
40 ms typically at 0 to
2 x set level
40 ms typically at 2 to
0 x set level
IBase
125
Technical Manual
Section 5
Differential protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
20 ms typically at 0 to
5 x set level
40 ms typically at 5 to
0 x set level
15 ms typically at 0 to
5 x set level
2 ms typically at 0 to 5
x set level
126
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.1
6.1.1
Identification
Function description
Underimpedance protection for
generators and transformers
6.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZGPDIS
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21G
Functionality
The underimpedance protection for generators and transformers ZGPDIS(21G), has the
offset mho characteristic as a three zone back-up protection for detection of short
circuits in transformers and generators. The three zones have independent measuring
and settings that gives high flexibility for all types of applications.
A load encroachment characteristic is available for the third zone as shown in figure
58.
127
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
jX
Operation area
Operation area
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en07000117.vsd
IEC07000117 V1 EN
Figure 58:
6.1.3
Function block
ZGPDIS (21G)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
LDCND
TRIP
TRZ1
TRZ2
TRZ3
PICKUP
PU_Z1
PU_Z2
STZ3
ANSI10000122-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000122 V1 EN
Figure 59:
6.1.4
Signals
Table 34:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
LDCND
INTEGER
56
128
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 35:
Name
6.1.5
Table 36:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip general
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
Trip zone 1
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
Trip zone 2
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
Trip zone 3
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Start general
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
Zone 1 Pick up
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
Zone 2 pick up
Z3_PU
BOOLEAN
zone 3 pick up
Settings
ZGPDIS (21G) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
ImpedanceAng
0 - 90
Deg
80
OpModeZ1
Disable-Zone
Enable-Zone
Disable-Zone
Z1Fwd
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z1Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
tZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
OpModeZ2
Disable-Zone
Enable-Zone
Disable-Zone
Z2Fwd
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z2Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
tZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
OpModeZ3
Disable-Zone
Enable-Zone
Disable-Zone
Z3Fwd
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z3Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
tZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
LoadEnchModZ3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
129
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 37:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
Default
6.1.6
Operation principle
6.1.6.1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
The execution of the different fault loops for phase-to-phase faults are executed in
parallel. The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to the
switched schemes that uses a pickup element to select correct voltage and current
depending on the fault type.
6.1.6.2
Impedance characteristic
The distance function consists of three zones. Each zone is self polarized offset mho
characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic is in accordance to
figure 60.
130
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
jx
Mho, zone3
Mho, zone2
Mho, zone1
R
IEC09000172_1_en.vsd
IEC09000172 V1 EN
Figure 60:
Zone 3 can be equipped with a load encroachment function which cuts off a section of
the characteristic when enabled. The function is activated by setting the parameter
LoadEnchModZ3 to Enable. Enabling of the load encroachment function increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load impedance.
The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the Load encroachment
(LEPDIS) function, where the relevant settings can be found. Information about load
encroachment from LEPDIS function to zone measurement is sent via the input signal
LDCND in binary format.
6.1.6.3
131
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Z1
F
ImpedanceAng
IEC10000176-1-en.vsd
IEC10000176 V1 EN
Figure 61:
The measuring loops can be time delayed individually by setting the parameter tZx
(where x is 1-3 depending on selected zone). To release the time delay, the operation
mode for the timers, x (where x is 1-3 depending on selected zone), has to be set to
Enabled. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.
The function are blocked in the following ways:
The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external or internal fuse failure
function.
6.1.6.4
Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the polarizing phasor by more than
90 degrees, the function operates and gives a trip output.
132
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZxFwd and ZxRev. The vector ZxFwd in the impedance plane has
the settable angle ImpadenceAng and the angle for ZxRev is ImpedanceAng+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is between 90 and 270 (figure 62). The
angle will be 90 or 270 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-B fault can be defined according to equation 30.
V - I AB ZxFwd
b = Arg
V - (- I AB Zx Re v)
(Equation 30)
ANSIEQUATION2320 V1 EN
where
EQUATION1801 V1 EN
IABX
Vcomp2 = VAB - (IL1L 2 ZxFwd )
IAB ZxFwd
V
Vcomp2 = VL1L 2 + (IL1l2 ZxRev )
IABR
-IAB ZxRev
ANSI09000174_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000174 V1 EN
Figure 62:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A-toB fault.
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.1.7
Technical data
Table 38:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
(0.005-3000.000) /
phase
(0.005-3000.000) /
phase
(10-90) degrees
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
55 ms typically
Reset ratio
105% typically
6.2
6.2.1
Identification
Function description
Loss of excitation
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
LEXPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
40
<
SYMBOL-MM V1 EN
6.2.2
Functionality
There are limits for the low excitation of a synchronous machine. A reduction of the
excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the stator. The machine
may lose the synchronism and start to operate like an induction machine. Then, the
reactive power consumption will increase. Even if the machine does not loose
synchronism it may not be acceptable to operate in this state for a long time. Reduction
of excitation increases the generation of heat in the end region of the synchronous
machine. The local heating may damage the insulation of the stator winding and the
iron core.
134
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
To prevent damages to the generator it should be tripped when excitation becomes too
low.
6.2.3
Function block
LEXPDIS (40)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRZ1
BLKTRZ2
TRIP
TRZ1
TRZ2
PICKUP
PU_Z1
PU_Z2
XOHM
XPERCENT
ROHM
RPERCENT
ANSI0700031-1-en.vsd
ANSI0700031 V1 EN
Figure 63:
6.2.4
Signals
Table 39:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTRZ1
BOOLEAN
BLKTRZ2
BOOLEAN
Table 40:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
XOHM
REAL
XPERCENT
REAL
ROHM
REAL
RPERCENT
REAL
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.5
Table 41:
Name
Settings
LEXPDIS (40) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
XoffsetZ1
-1000.00 - 1000.00
0.01
-10.00
Z1diameter
0.01 - 3000.00
0.01
100.00
tZ1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.01
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
XoffsetZ2
-1000.00 - 1000.00
0.01
-10.00
Z2diameter
0.01 - 3000.00
0.01
200.00
tZ2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
Step
Default
Table 42:
Name
Unit
Description
DirSuperv
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
XoffsetDirLine
-1000.00 - 3000.00
0.01
0.00
DirAngle
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
-13.0
Step
Default
Table 43:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
6.2.6
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
The Loss of excitation (LEXPDIS ,40) protection in the IED measures the apparent
positive sequence impedance seen out from the generator.
136
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Measured mode
Zposseq
Vposseq
I posseq
EQUATION2051-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 31)
There are three characteristics in LEXPDIS (40) protection as shown in figure 64.
Naimly:
UnderexitationProtection
protection
Underexcitation
Restrainarea
area
Restrain
R
R
Directional
blinder
Figure 64:
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z1 this zone will operate, normally
with a short delay. The zone is related to the dynamic stability of the generator.
When the apparent impedance reaches the zone Z2 this zone will operate, normally
with a longer delay. The zone is related to the static stability of the generator.
LEXPDIS (40) protection also has a directional blinder (supervision). See figure 64.
137
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
In LEXPDIS (40) function the zone measurement is done as shown in figure 65.
Offset
R
XoffsetZ1
Z1diameter
Z (apparent impedance)
Z1 = Z - (XoffsetZ1 +
Z1diameter/2)
Z1 or Z2
en06000456-2.vsd
IEC06000456 V2 EN
Figure 65:
The impedance Z1 is constructed out from the measured apparent impedance Z and the
impedance corresponding to the centre point of the impedance characteristic (Z1 or
Z2). If the magnitude of this impedance is less than the radius (diameter/2) of the
characteristic, this part of the protection will operate.
If the directional restrain is set off the impedance zone operation will start the
appropriate timer and LEXPDIS (40) will trip after the set delay (tZ1 or tZ2).
If the directional restrain is set On the directional release function must also operate to
enable operation. A new impedance is constructed as XoffsetDirLine. If the phase angle
of this impedance is less than the set DirAngle LEXPDIS (40) function will be
released, see figure 66.
138
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Underexcitation Protection
Restrain area
XoffsetDirLine
DirAngle
Z (apparent impedance)
en06000457.vsd
IEC06000457 V1 EN
Figure 66:
139
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Positive
sequence
current
phasor
Positive
sequence
voltage
phasor
Apparent
impedance
calculation
Z in
Z1 char.
AND
Z in
Z2 char.
AND
pickupZ1
tZ1
0
TripZ1
pickupZ2
tZ2
0
TripZ2
Dir.
Restrain
OR
Dir.Restrain Enabled
en060004582_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000458 V2 EN
Figure 67:
6.2.7
Technical data
Table 44:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1000.001000.00)% of ZBase
2.0% of Vn/In
(0.003000.00)% of ZBase
2.0% of Vn/In
Timers
(0.006000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
6.3
6.3.1
Identification
Function description
Out-of-step protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OOSPPAM
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78
<
140
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.3.2
Functionality
Out-of-step protection (OOSPPAM, 78) function in the IED can be used both for
generator protection application as well as, line protection applications.
The main purpose of the OOSPPAM, 78 function is to detect, evaluate, and take the
required action during pole slipping occurrences in the power system.
The OOSPPAM, 78 function detects pole slip conditions and trips the generator as fast
as possible, after the first pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1,
which normally includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If the center
of oscillation is found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2, more than one
pole-slip is usually allowed before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. If
there are several out-of-step relays in the power system, then the one which finds the
center of oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.
6.3.3
Function block
OOSPPAM (78)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRIPZ1
BLOCK
TRIPZ2
BLKGEN
RI
BLKMOT
GENMODE
EXTZONE1
MOTMODE
R
X
ANSI10000106-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000106 V2 EN
Figure 68:
6.3.4
Signals
Table 45:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKGEN
BOOLEAN
BLKMOT
BOOLEAN
EXTZONE1
BOOLEAN
141
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 46:
Name
6.3.5
Table 47:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIPZ1
BOOLEAN
Zone 1 trip
TRIPZ2
BOOLEAN
Zone 2 trip
RI
BOOLEAN
GENMODE
BOOLEAN
MOTMODE
BOOLEAN
REAL
REAL
Settings
OOSPPAM (78) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On / Off
OperationZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
ReachZ1
1.00 - 100.00
0.01
50.00
OperationZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
tBreaker
0.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.000
Table 48:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NoOfSlipsZ1
1 - 20
NoOfSlipsZ2
1 - 60
tReset
1.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000
142
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 49:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
ForwardR
0.00 - 1000.00
% Zb
0.01
1.00
ForwardX
0.00 - 1000.00
% Zb
0.01
10.00
ReverseR
0.00 - 1000.00
% Zb
0.01
1.00
ReverseX
0.00 - 1000.00
% Zb
0.01
10.00
Table 50:
Name
Default
pick up Angle
90.0 - 130.0
Deg
0.1
110.0
TripAngle
15.0 - 90.0
Deg
0.1
60.0
6.3.6
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Operation principle
General
Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor angle
(power angle), delivering to the power system active electrical power which is
approximately equal to the mechanical input on the generator axis. The currents and
voltages are constant and stable. An out-of-step condition is characterized by periodic
changes of the rotor angle, that is, the synchronizing power, rotational speed, currents
and voltages. When displayed in the complex impedance plane, these changes are
characterized by a cyclic change in the complex load impedance Z(R, X) as measured
at the terminals of the generator, or at the terminals of a power line connecting two
power sub-systems. This is shown in Figure 69.
143
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
trajectory
1.5
of Z(R, X)
The 2nd
pole slip
occurred
The 1st
pole slip
occurred
Pre-disturbance
RE
normal load
- - - --------- - - Z(R, X)
- - 3 ------ ------ - - Zone 2
--- 2 1 --0
--^ --^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ -^- ^ ^ ^ --^
-Zone 1
------- relay
-R in Ohms
--limit of reach -----lens determined
- - ----- -----0- - pre-disturbance Z(R, X)
- by the setting - - - - -------- - - - - 1 Z(R, X) under 3-phase fault
Pickup Angle = 120 SE
2 Z(R, X) when fault cleared
0.5
-0.5
-1
to the 3rd
pole-slip
X in Ohms
-1.5
-1
-0.5
0
0.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
1.5
ANSI10000109-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000109 V1 EN
Figure 69:
Under typical, normal load conditions, when the protected generator supplies the active
and the reactive power to the power system, the complex impedance Z(R, X) is in the
1st quadrant, point 0 in Figure 69. One can see that under a three-phase fault
conditions, the centre of oscillation is at the point of fault, point 1, which is logical, as
all three voltages are zero or near zero at that point. Under the fault conditions the
generator accelerated and when the fault has finally been cleared, the complex
impedance Z(R, X) jumped to the point 2. By that time, the generator has already lost
its step, Z(R, X) continues it way from the right-hand side to the left-hand side, and the
1st pole-slip cannot be avoided. If the generator is not immediately disconnected, it
then continues pole-slipping see Figure 69, where two pole-slips (two pole-slip cycles)
are shown. Under out-of-step conditions, the centre of oscillation is where the locus of
the complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the (impedance) line connecting the points SE
(Sending End), and RE (Receiving End). The point on the SE RE line where the
trajectory of Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line can change with time and is mainly a
function of the internal induced voltages at both ends of the equivalent two-machine
system, that is, at points SE and RE.
Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance
relative to a generators terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable means
of detecting whether machines are out-of-phase and pole-slipping is taking place.
Measurement of the rotor (power) angle is important as well.
144
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Rotor (power) angle can be thought of as the angle between the two lines, connecting
point 0 in Figure 69, that is, Z(R, X) under normal load, with the points SE and RE,
respectively. These two lines are not shown in Figure 69. Normal values of the power
angle, that is, under stable, steady-state, load conditions are from 30 to 60 electrical
degrees. It can be observed in Figure 70 that the angle reaches 180 degrees when the
complex impedance Z(R, X) crosses the impedance line SE RE. It then changes the
sign, and continues from -180 degrees to 0 degrees, and so on. Figure 70 shows the
rotor (power) angle and the magnitude of Z(R, X) against the time for the case from
Figure 69.
4
3
|Z| in Ohms
angle in rad
normal
load
2
1
rotor (power)
angle
|Z|
0
fault 500 ms
fault
occurrs
-1
-2
-3
-4
200
400
600
800
1000
Time in milliseconds
1200
1400
IEC10000110-1-en.vsd
IEC10000110 V1 EN
Figure 70:
In order to be able to fully understand the principles of OOSPPAM (78), a stable case,
that is, a case where the disturbance does not make a generator to go out-of-step, must
be shown.
145
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
SE
0.8
relay
X [Ohm]
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-1
Z(R,X) 20 ms
after line out
fault
- - - - - RE
- ----- ----- 4 - ---zone 2 - ------ 2
---1
------ fault
-3
X-line ^ -^ ^ ^ ^ ---^ ^
^
^
^ ^ ^ ^ ^-- ^ ^ ^ -^
----- Z-line
--------limit of
-- relay
lens -reach
-110 -----zone 1- ------------ ------- ---- - -- - - -- - SE
0.6
-1
RE
-0.5
pre-fault
Z(R,X)
5
0
0 pre-fault Z(R, X)
3 Z(R, X) under fault
5 Z 20 ms after line out
6 pow er line reclosed
0
0.5
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
1.5
IEC10000111-1-en.vsd
IEC10000111 V1 EN
Figure 71:
A stable case where the disturbance does not make the generator to
go out-of-step
It shall be observed that in a stable case, as shown in Figure 71, where the disturbance
does not cause the generator to lose step, the complex impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens
characteristic on the same side (point 4) it entered it (point 2), and never re-enters the
lens. In a stable case, where the protected generator remains in synchronism, the
complex impedance returns to quadrant 1, and, after the oscillations fade, it returns to
the initial normal load position (point 0), or near.
6.3.6.1
Lens characteristic
A precondition in order to be able to construct a suitable lens characteristic is that the
power system in which OOSPPAM (78) is installed, is modeled as a two-machine
equivalent system, or as a single machine infinite bus equivalent power system. Then
the impedances from the position of OOSPPAM (78) in the direction of the normal
load flow (that is from the measurement point to the remote system) can be taken as
forward. The lens characteristic, as shown in Figure 69 and Figure 71, is obtained so
that two equal in size but differently offset Mho characteristics are set to overlap. The
resultant lens characteristic is the loci of constant rotor (power) angle. An advantage of
this characteristic is that the lens is the loci of complex impedance Z(R, X) for which
the rotor (power) angle is constant, for example 110 degrees or 120 degrees; these are
the angles where stability problems are very likely. Figure 72 illustrates construction of
the lens characteristic for a power system.
146
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X
Position of the OOS
- RE
- - relay is the origin of
- -- - -- ---the R - X plane
----- Ze
- Zone 2
--X-line
----- Zline
determined
-by the ^ ^- ^
---^ ^ ^- ^
^ ^ ^ ^
setting
^ ^ ^ --- ^
--^ ^ ^ReachZ1 ---Ztr
R
---- Zone 1 -relay
-120 -- Z(R,X) ---- Z-line --Zgen
----limit-of-reach --- Lens is -the locus
-circle depends on-of constant
rotor (power)
----the position of the angle,
e.g. 120.
--- - - points SE and RE
- - - - - - - - - Lens' width determined
SE
by the setting Pickup Angle
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-0.8
-0.6
-0.4
-0.2
0
0.2
0.4
Real part (R) of Z in Ohms
0.6
0.8
ANSI10000112-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000112 V1 EN
Figure 72:
ReverseZ
ForwardZ(ForwardR, ForwardX)
Zgen(Rgen, Xgen)
Ztr(Rtr, Xtr)
13.8 kV
Zeq(Req, Xeq)
Infinite power
system
Transformer
13.8 / 220 kV
Generator
13.8 kV
Zline(Rline, Xline)
Power line
220 kV
System
equivalent
SE
REG
RE
Out-Of-Step
protection
OOSPPAM
ReverseR = Rg
ReverseX = Xd
IEC10000113 V1 EN
Figure 73:
Section 6
Impedance protection
Zeq(Req, Xeq), and the setting PickupAngle, for example 120 degrees. All impedances
must be referred to the voltage level where the out-of-step protection relay is placed; in
this case shown in Figure 73 this is the generator nominal voltage level. The
impedances from the position of the out-of-step protection in the direction of the
normal load flow can be taken as forward.
The out-of-step relay, as in Figure 73 looks into the system and the impedances in that
direction are forward impedances:
Resistances are much smaller than reactances, but can in general not be neglected. The
ratio (ForwardX + ReverseX) / (ForwardR + ReverseR) determines the inclination of
the Z-line, connecting the point SE (Sending End) and RE (Receiving End), and is
typically approximately 85 degrees. While the length of the Z-line depends on the
values of ForwardX, ReverseX, ForwardR, and ReverseR, the width of the lens is a
function of the setting PickupAngle.The lens is broader for smaller values of the
PickupAngle, and becomes a circle for PickupAngle = 90 degrees.
When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens, trouble is imminent, and a
pickup signal is issued. The angle recommended to form the lens is 110 or 120 degrees,
because it is this rotor (power) angle where real trouble with dynamic stability usually
begins. Rotor (power) angle 120 degrees is sometimes called the angle of no return
because if this angle is reached under generator swings, the generator is most likely to
lose step.
6.3.6.2
148
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
results in a tendency to miss the 1st pole-slip, that one immediately after the fault has
been cleared.) The above timing is used to discriminate a fault from an out-of-step
condition. In Figure 69, some important points on the trajectory of Z(R, X) are
designated. Point 0: the pre-fault, normal load Z(R, X). Point 1: impedance Z under a
three-phase, low-resistance fault. Z lies practically on, or very near, the Z-line.
Transition of the measured Z from point 0 to point 1 takes app. 20 ms, due to Fourier
filters. Point 2: Z immediately after the fault has been cleared. Transition of the
measured Z from point 1 to point 2 takes approximately 20 ms, due to Fourier filters.
The complex impedance then travels in the direction from the right to the left, and exits
the lens on the opposite side. When the complex impedance exits the lens on the side
opposite to its entrance, the 1st pole-slip has already occurred and more pole-slips can
be expected if the generator is not disconnected. Figure 69 shows two pole-slips.
Figures like Figure 69 and Figure 71 are always possible to draw by means of the
analogue output data from the pole-slip function, and are of great help with eventual
investigations of the performance of the out-of-step function.
6.3.6.3
PickupAngle []
1000
1.000
traverseTimeMin [ ms ]
180 []
(Equation 32)
ANSIEQUATION2319 V1 EN
(default 110)
149
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The minimum value of fsMax is 6.994 Hz. When PickupAngle = 110degrees, fsMax =
7.777Hz. This implies, that the default PickupAngle = 110 degrees covers 90% of cases
as, the typical final slip frequency is between 2 - 5Hz. In practice, however, before the
slip frequency for example, 7.777 Hz is reached, at least three pole-slips have occurred.
The exact instantaneous slip-frequency expressed in Hz (corresponding to number of
pole slips per second) is difficult to calculate. The easiest and most exact method is to
measure time between two successive pole slips. This means that, the instantaneous slipfrequency is measured only after the second pole-slip, if the protected machine is not
already disconnected after the first pole-slip. The measured value of slipsPerSecond
(SLIPFREQ) is equal to the average slip-frequency of the machine between the last
two successive pole-slips.
6.3.6.4
150
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
0.6
trip
region
0.4
0.2
3
here rotor
angle
is -90
no trip
region
inside
circle
-0.2
-0.4
outside the
circle is the trip
region for
TripAngle <= 90
-0.6
-0.4
X[Ohm]
no trip
region
1
2
no trip
region
rotor angle
= 180
relay
here
rotor angle
is +90
R[Ohm]
Z - line connects
points SE & RE
this circle
is loci of
the rotor
angle = 90
0.6
0.8
IEC10000114-1-en.vsd
IEC10000114 V1 EN
Figure 74:
The imaginary offset Mho circle represents loci of the impedance Z(R,
X) for which the rotor angle is 90 degrees
151
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
35
30
25
2nd
20
15
fault
occurs
10
5
trip command
issued here
normal load current
min. current
tBreaker = 60 ms
rotor angle
0
-5
after 1st
pole slip
angle towards 0
0
200
400
600
800
Time in milliseconds
1000
1200
IEC10000115-1-en.vsd
IEC10000115 V1 EN
Figure 75:
6.3.6.5
Design
When the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the limit-of-reach region, the algorithm
determines the direction impedance Z moves, that is, the direction the lens is traversed
and measures the time taken to traverse the lens from one side to the other. If the
traverse time is more than the limit 40 or 50 ms, a pole-slip is declared. If the complex
impedance Z(R, X) exits the lens on the same side it entered, then it is a stable case and
the protected machine is still in synchronism. If a pole-slip has been detected, then it is
determined in which zone the centre of oscillation is located. If the number of actual poleslips exceeds the maximum number of allowed pole-slips in either of the zones, a trip
command is issued taking care of the circuit breaker safety.
152
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
UPSRE
UPSIM
UPSMAG
IPSRE
IPSIM
R
X
Calculation of
R and X parts
of the complex
positivesequence
impedance
Z(R, X)
R
X
Z(R,X)
Z(R,X)
within limit of
reach?
NO
Return
YES
Z(R,X)
within lens
characteristic?
UCOSPHI
NO
ROTORANG
Function alert
SLIPFREQ
YES
LEFT
Motor losing
step ?
Calculation of
positive-sequence
active power P,
reactive power Q,
rotor angle
ROTORANG
and
UCOSPHI
Z(R,X)
entered lens
from?
GEBMODE
Z(R,X)
exited lens
on the left-hand
side?
Generator losing
step ?
YES
RIGHT
Was
traverse time
more than
50 ms?
MOTMODE
NO
NO
YES (pole-slip!)
Q
UCOSPHI
ZONE 2
ROTORANG
>= 1
Number
of pole-slips
exceeded in
a zone?
TRIP
NO
ZONE 1
Open
circuit
breaker
safely
TRIPZ1
TRIPZ2
IEC10000116-1-en.vsd
IEC10000116 V1 EN
Figure 76:
6.3.7
Technical data
Table 51:
Function
Accuracy
Remark
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
153
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Function
Range or value
ROTORANG
Accuracy
SLIPFREQ
0.1 10 Hz
UCOSPHI
6.4
6.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Load encroachment
6.4.2
Remark
LEPDIS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Heavy load transfer is common in many power networks and may make fault
resistance coverage difficult to achieve. In such a case, Load encroachment (LEPDIS)
function can be used to prevent operation of the of the underimpedance measuring
zones during heavy loads.
6.4.3
Function block
LEPDIS
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
DLECND
ANSI10000119-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000119 V1 EN
Figure 77:
154
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.4.4
Signals
Table 52:
Name
Type
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Table 53:
Name
Type
DLECND
6.4.5
Settings
Table 54:
Description
INTEGER
Unit
Name
Values (Range)
Step
Default
RLd
0.05 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
1.00
LdAngle
5 - 85
Deg
38
Table 55:
Name
Values (Range)
GlobalBaseSel
6.4.6
1-6
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of Load encroachment LEPDIS is the
same as for the distance zone measuring function. LEPDIS includes three impedance
measuring loops intended for phase-to-phase as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference compared to the distance zone measuring function is in the combination
of measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of faults.
The current pickup condition DLECND is based on the following criteria:
1.
2.
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.4.6.1
Load encroachment
Each of the three measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 78. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders and the angle of the sectors are the same in all four quadrants.
X
RLd
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
RLd
LdAngle
ANSI10000144-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000144 V1 EN
Figure 78:
The reach is limited by the minimum operation current and the distance measuring zones.
6.4.6.2
156
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
A
R
AB
Block
3I 0 0.05
&
&
&
3I 0 0.2 Iphmax
&
Bool to
integer
BLOCK
3I 0 < 0.1
&
OR
10 ms 20 ms
t
t
DLECND
&
ANSI10000226-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000226 V1 EN
Figure 79:
6.4.7
Technical data
Table 56:
Function
Range or value
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-85) degrees
Reset ratio
105% typically
Accuracy
5.0% static accuracy
2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
-
157
Technical Manual
158
Section 7
Current protection
Section 7
Current protection
7.1
7.1.1
Identification
Function description
Four step phase overcurrent protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OC4PTOC
3I>
4
4
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51/67
alt
TOC-REVA V1 EN
7.1.2
Functionality
The four step phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67) has
independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.
The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to
be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
159
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.1.3
Function block
OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
BLOCK
TRST2
BLK1
TRST3
BLK2
TRST4
BLK3
PICKUP
BLK4
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
ANSI08000002-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000002 V1 EN
Figure 80:
7.1.4
Signals
Table 57:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
BLK3
BOOLEAN
Block of step 3
BLK4
BOOLEAN
Block of step 4
Table 58:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Section 7
Current protection
Name
7.1.5
Table 59:
Name
Type
Description
PU_ST3
BOOLEAN
PU_ST4
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist1
Pickup1
5 - 2500
%IB
1000
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
161
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Pickup2
5 - 2500
%IB
500
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Pickup3
5 - 2500
%IB
250
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist4
Pickup4
5 - 2500
%IB
175
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
1 - 10000
%IB
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Table 60:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
MeasType
DFT
RMS
DFT
162
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.1.6
Monitored data
Table 61:
Name
7.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DIR_A
INTEGER
0=No direction
1=Forward
2=Reverse
DIR_B
INTEGER
0=No direction
1=Forward
2=Reverse
DIR_C
INTEGER
0=No direction
1=Forward
2=Reverse
I_A
REAL
Current in phase A
I_B
REAL
Current in phase B
I_C
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The Four step overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67) is divided into three
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and
4, an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx: Disable/Non-directional/Forward/
Reverse.
The protection design can be decomposed in three parts:
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase
overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to select the type of
the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to select either discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option
is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
163
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Vref_A = VA Idir_A = IA
Vref_B = VB Idir_B = IB
Vref_C = VC IdirC = IC
164
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Vref
1
2
2
4
Idir
ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN
Figure 81:
If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed. A wide range of
standardized inverse time characteristics is available. The possibilities for inverse time
characteristics are described in section "Inverse time characteristics".
All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
The binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
165
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.1.8
Technical data
Table 62:
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Operate current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
(1-10000)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In 1.0% of I at
I > In
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25ms
17 curve types
20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
7.2
7.2.1
Identification
Function description
Four step residual overcurrent
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EF4PTOC
IN
4
4
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N/67N
alt
TEF-REVA V1 EN
166
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.2.2
Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection (EF4PTOC, 51N/67N) has independent
inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.
The directional function includes 3 options
voltage polarized
current polarized
dual polarized
7.2.3
Function block
EF4PTOC (51N_67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
I3PPOL*
TRST2
BLOCK
TRST3
BLK1
TRST4
BLK2
BFI_3P
BLK3
PUST1
BLK4
PUST2
PUST3
PUST4
PUFW
PUREV
2NDHARMD
ANSI08000004-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000004 V1 EN
Figure 82:
7.2.4
Signals
Table 63:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Type
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
BLK3
BOOLEAN
BLK4
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 65:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 64:
7.2.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
PUST1
BOOLEAN
PUST2
BOOLEAN
PUST3
BOOLEAN
PUST4
BOOLEAN
PUFW
BOOLEAN
PUREV
BOOLEAN
2NDHARMD
BOOLEAN
Settings
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
polMethod
Voltage
Current
Dual
Voltage
Type of polarization
VPolMin
1 - 100
%VB
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
5.00
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Step
Default
XNPol
Values (Range)
0.50 - 3000.00
Unit
ohm
0.01
40.00
Description
Imaginary part of source Z to be used for
current polarisation
INDirPU
1 - 100
%IB
10
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist1
Pickup1
1 - 2500
%IB
100
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Pickup2
1 - 2500
%IB
50
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50
HarmRestrain2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
169
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Pickup3
1 - 2500
%IB
33
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
IMin3
1 - 10000
%IB
33
HarmRestrain3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist4
Pickup4
1 - 2500
%IB
17
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
1 - 10000
%IB
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain4
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Table 66:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
170
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.2.6
Monitored data
Table 67:
Name
7.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IOp
REAL
VPol
REAL
kV
IPol
REAL
VPolIang
REAL
deg
IPOLIANG
REAL
deg
Operation principle
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
7.2.7.1
171
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
2.
calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I op = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
(Equation 33)
EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN
where:
IA, IB, IC
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If
the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal PUSTx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a
common PICKUP signal.
7.2.7.2
Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction
to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use the residual voltage -3V0 as
polarizing quantity V3P. This voltage can be:
172
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
1.
2.
VVPol = 3 Vo = VA + VB + VC
EQUATION2012-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 34)
where:
VA, VB, VC
Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor is
used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage polarizing
the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level defined by
setting parameter VpolMin.
It shall be noted that 3V0 is used to determine the location of the ground fault. This
insures the required inversion of the polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use the residual current (3I0) as
polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1.
2.
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection)
calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
173
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
(Equation 35)
where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the
phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. This
phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in
order to calculate equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following
formula:
VIPol = Zo S I Pol = ( RNPol + j XNPOL ) I Pol
EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 36)
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum
level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
VTotPol = VVPol + VIPol = -3V0 + Z 0 s IPol = -3V0 + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) IPol
ANSIEQUATION1878 V1 EN
(Equation 37)
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/
Reverse).
7.2.7.3
174
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the
IED:
1.
2.
7.2.7.4
7.2.7.5
7.2.7.6
175
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section
"Inverse time characteristics".
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves and reset time delay are
defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second
harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 83.
Characteristn=DefTime
|IOP|
Pickupx
tx
OR
a>b
TRSTx
PUSTx
AND
Inverse
BLKx
BLOCK
Characteristn=Inverse
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrainx=Disabled
OR
DirModeSelx=Disabled
STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
DirModeSelx=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI09000638-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000638 V1 EN
Figure 83:
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, PUSTx and TRSTx, can be blocked from the binary input
BLKn.
7.2.7.7
176
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
1.
2.
3.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 84, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.
Reverse
Area
0.6INDirPU
VPol=-3Vo
AngleRCA
INDirPU
Forward
Area
Iop=3Io
ANSI07000066-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000066 V2 EN
Figure 84:
177
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:
1.
2.
178
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
|Iop|
a
b
0.6
a>b
X
a
INDirPU
0.4
PUREV
AND
REVERSE_Int
a>b
FORWARD_Int
PUFW
AND
FWD
OR
VPolMin
polMethod=Dual
VPol
polMethod=Current
T
0.0 F
OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol
IPolMin
Iop
VTPol
RVS
T
F
VIPol
Complex
Number
0.0
T
F
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
polMethod=Voltage
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
BLOCK
ANSI07000067-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000067 V3 EN
Figure 85:
7.2.8
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
Technical data
Table 68:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
(1100)% of lBase
1.0% of In
(1-10000)% of lBase
Section 7
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
17 curve types
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(2-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
(0.503000.00) W/phase
30 ms typically at 0,5 to 2 x IN
30 ms typically at 2 to 0,5 x IN
7.3
7.3.1
Identification
Function description
Sensitive directional residual over
current and power protection
7.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
SDEPSDE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
67N
Functionality
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance grounding, the ground fault
current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. In addition to this, the
magnitude of the fault current is almost independent on the fault location in the
network. The protection can be selected to use either the residual current or residual
power component 3V03I0cos j, for operating quantity. There is also available one nondirectional 3I0 step and one non-directional 3V0 overvoltage tripping step.
180
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.3.3
Function block
SDEPSDE (67N)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKVN
TRIP
TRDIRIN
TRNDIN
TRVN
PICKUP
PUDIRIN
PUNDIN
PUVN
PUFW
PUREV
CND
VNREL
ANSI08000036-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000036 V1 EN
Figure 86:
7.3.4
Signals
Table 69:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKVN
BOOLEAN
Table 70:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRDIRIN
BOOLEAN
TRNDIN
BOOLEAN
TRVN
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PUDIRIN
BOOLEAN
PUNDIN
BOOLEAN
PUVN
BOOLEAN
PUFW
BOOLEAN
181
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
7.3.5
Table 71:
Name
Type
Description
PUREV
BOOLEAN
CND
INTEGER
Direction of fault
VNREL
BOOLEAN
Settings
SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpModeSel
3I0Cosfi
3I03V0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
3I0Cosfi
DirMode
Forward
Reverse
Forward
RCADir
-179 - 180
Deg
-90
RCAComp
-10.0 - 10.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
ROADir
0 - 90
Deg
90
INCosPhiPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
SN_PU
0.25 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
INDirPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
5.00
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
TDSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
OpINNonDir
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
INNonDirPU
1.00 - 400.00
%IB
0.01
10.00
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
182
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimeChar
t_MinTripDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
TDIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
OpVN
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
VN_PU
1.00 - 300.00
%VB
0.01
20.00
tVN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
INRelPU
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
VNRelPU
1.00 - 300.00
%VB
0.01
3.00
Step
Default
Table 72:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
183
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.3.6
Monitored data
Table 73:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
INCOSPHI
REAL
IN
REAL
VN
REAL
kV
SN
REAL
MVA
Measured magnitude of
residual power 3I03V0cos(FiRCA)
ANG FI-RCA
REAL
deg
7.3.7
Operation principle
7.3.7.1
Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-processor
blocks.
The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
7.3.7.2
184
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Vref
RCA = 0, ROA = 90
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
-3V0=Vref
3I0 cos
en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN
Figure 87:
RCADir set to 0
Vref
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang(3I0) ang(Vref)
-3V0
en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN
Figure 88:
For trip, both the residual current 3I0cos and the release voltage 3V0, must be larger
than the set levels: INCosPhiPU and VNRelPU.
185
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time delay.
There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is
larger than a set value as shown in figure 89. This is equivalent to blocking of the
function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.
3I0
3I0 cos
Operate area
-3V0=Vref
RCA = 0
ROA
en06000650_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000650 V1 EN
Figure 89:
186
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Operate area
-3V0=Vref
Instrument
transformer
angle error
RCA = 0
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim)
en06000651_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000651 V1 EN
Figure 90:
7.3.7.3
Explanation of RCAComp
187
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
tinv =
EQUATION2032-ANSI V2 EN
7.3.7.4
Operate area
3I0
80
-3V0
en06000652_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000652 V1 EN
Figure 91:
Example of characteristic
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than
the set levels INDirPU and VNRelPU and the angle shall be in the set sector ROADir
and RCADir.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
188
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.3.7.5
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the
forward direction, and PUREV: Pickup in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse
direction will give the pickup signal PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the
pickup signal PUFW.
7.3.7.6
7.3.7.7
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
When the function is activated binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the activation
is active after the set delay tVNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A simplified
logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 92.
PUNDIN
INNonDirPU
UN_PU
0-t
0
TRNDIN
0-t
0
TRVN
PUVN
OpMODE=INcosPhi
Pickup_N
AND
INCosPhiPU
OpMODE=INVNCosPhi
AND
OR
PUDIRIN
AND
INVNCosPhiPU
SN
AND
TRDIRIN
TimeChar = InvTime
AND
TimeChar = DefTime
DirMode = Forw
AND
AND
OR
PUFW
Forw
DirMode = Rev
AND
PUREV
Rev
en06000653_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000653 V1 EN
Figure 92:
190
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.3.8
Technical data
Table 74:
Function
Range or value
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of SBase
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
(1.00-400.00)% of lBase
At low setting:
(10-50) mA
Accuracy
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
0.5 mA
1.0 mA
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
10% of set value
1.0% of In at In
1.0% of I at I > In
0.5 mA
1.0 mA
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
1.0 mA
(1.00-200.00)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA
(10-50) mA
0.5 mA
1.0 mA
0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
17 curve types
2.0 degrees
(0-90) degrees
2.0 degrees
191
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
25 ms typically
7.4
7.4.1
Identification
Function description
Thermal overload protection, two time
constants
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
TRPTTR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
49
SYMBOL-A V1 EN
7.4.2
Functionality
If a power transformer or generator reaches very high temperatures the equipment
might be damaged. The insulation within the transformer/generator will have forced
ageing. As a consequence of this the risk of internal phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground
faults will increase. High temperature will degrade the quality of the transformer/
generator insulation.
The thermal overload protection estimates the internal heat content of the transformer/
generator (temperature) continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal
model of the transformer/generator with two time constants, which is based on current
measurement.
Two warning pickup levels are available. This enables actions in the power system to
be done before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to
increase to the trip value, the protection initiates a trip of the protected transformer/
generator.
192
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.4.3
Function block
TRPTTR (49)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
COOLING
ALARM1
RESET
ALARM2
LOCKOUT
WARNING
ANSI08000037-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000037 V1 EN
Figure 93:
7.4.4
Signals
TRPTTR is not provided with external temperature sensor in first
release of 650 series. The only input that influences the temperature
measurement is the binary input COOLING.
Table 75:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
COOLING
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
Table 76:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip Signal
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal
ALARM1
BOOLEAN
ALARM2
BOOLEAN
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Lockout signal
WARNING
BOOLEAN
193
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.4.5
Table 77:
Name
Settings
TRPTTR (49) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
IRef
10.0 - 1000.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
IBase1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
IBase2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB
1.0
100.0
Tau1
1.0 - 500.0
Min
1.0
60.0
Tau2
1.0 - 500.0
Min
1.0
60.0
IHighTau1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB1
1.0
100.0
Tau1High
5 - 2000
%tC1
100
ILowTau1
30.0 - 250.0
%IB1
1.0
100.0
Tau1Low
5 - 2000
%tC1
100
IHighTau2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB2
1.0
100.0
Tau2High
5 - 2000
%tC2
100
ILowTau2
30.0 - 250.0
%IB2
1.0
100.0
Tau2Low
5 - 2000
%tC2
100
ITrip
50.0 - 250.0
%IBx
1.0
110.0
Alarm1
50.0 - 99.0
%Itr
1.0
80.0
Alarm2
50.0 - 99.0
%Itr
1.0
90.0
LockoutReset
10.0 - 95.0
%Itr
1.0
60.0
Warning
1.0 - 500.0
Min
0.1
30.0
Step
Default
Table 78:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
194
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.4.6
Monitored data
Table 79:
Name
7.4.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TTRIP
REAL
TTRIPCAL
INTEGER
TRESCAL
INTEGER
TRESLO
REAL
HEATCONT
REAL
I-MEASUR
REAL
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the
true RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to
the Thermal overload protection, two time constants (TRPTTR, 49).
From the largest of the three phase currents a relative final temperature (heat content)
is calculated according to the expression:
Q final
I
=
I ref
(Equation 39)
EQUATION1171 V1 EN
where:
I
Iref
If this calculated relative temperature is larger than the relative temperature level
corresponding to the set operate (trip) current a pickup output signal PICKUP is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
195
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Q final > Q n
If
EQUATION1172 V1 EN
(Equation 40)
Dt
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
(Equation 41)
EQUATION1173 V1 EN
Q final < Qn
If
EQUATION1174 V1 EN
Qn = Q final - ( Q final - Q n -1 ) e
EQUATION1175 V1 EN
(Equation 42)
Dt
(Equation 43)
where:
Qn
Qn-1
Qfinal
Dt
Q
- Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
EQUATION1176 V1 EN
(Equation 44)
196
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a
real figure TTRIP.
After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when
the temperature of the object is above the set lockout release temperature setting ResLo.
The time to lockout release is calculated, That is, a calculation of the cooling time to a
set value.
Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q
Q
final
n
EQUATION1177 V1 EN
(Equation 45)
In the above equation, the final temperature is calculated according to equation 39.
Since the transformer normally is disconnected, the current I is zero and thereby the
final is also zero. The calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is
exported from the function as a real figure, TRESLO.
When the current is so high that it has given a pickup signal PICKUP, the estimated
time to trip is continuously calculated and given as analog output TTRIP. If this
calculated time get less than the setting time Warning, set in minutes, the output
WARNING is activated.
197
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Final Temp
> TripTemp
PICKUP
Calculation
of heat
content
I3P
Calculation
of final
temperature
ALARM1
ALARM2
Management of
setting
parameters: Tau
S
R
Tau used
LOCKOUT
Actual Temp
< Recl
Temp
Calculation
of time to
trip
Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout
TTRIP
WARNING if time to trip < set value
TRESLO
ANSI08000040-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000040 V1 EN
Figure 94:
198
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.4.8
Technical data
Table 80:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(30250)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Operate time:
Operate current
(50250)% of IBase
1.0% of In
I 2 - I p2
t = t ln 2
I - Ib 2
EQUATION1356 V1 EN
(Equation 46)
I = Imeasured
7.5
7.5.1
Identification
Function description
Breaker failure protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CCRBRF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50BF
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
7.5.2
Functionality
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF, 50BF) ensures fast back-up tripping of
surrounding breakers in case the protected breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can
be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against unnecessary operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
199
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF, 50BF) current criteria can be fulfilled by one or
two phase currents, or one phase current plus residual current. When those currents
exceed the user defined settings, the function is activated. These conditions increase
the security of the back-up trip command.
CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a three-phase re-trip of the
protected breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers.
7.5.3
Function block
CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P*
BLOCK
BFI_3P
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C
TRBU
TRRET
ANSI09000272-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000272 V1 EN
Figure 95:
7.5.4
Signals
Table 81:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
52a_A
BOOLEAN
52a_B
BOOLEAN
52a_C
BOOLEAN
Table 82:
Name
Description
TRBU
BOOLEAN
TRRET
BOOLEAN
200
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.5.5
Table 83:
Name
Settings
CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Pickup_PH
5 - 200
%IB
10
Pickup_N
2 - 200
%IB
10
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Table 84:
Name
Pickup_BlkCont
Table 85:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.5.6
Unit
Step
%IB
Default
20
Description
Current for blocking of 52a operation in % of
Ibase
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 86:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
I_A
REAL
I_B
REAL
I_C
REAL
IN
REAL
201
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.5.7
Operation principle
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) is initiated from protection trip command, either
from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The initiate signal is general for all three phases. A re-trip attempt can be made after a
set time delay. The re-trip function can be done with or without current or contact
check. With the current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the
circuit breaker is larger than the operate current level. With contact check the re-trip is
only performed if breaker is indicated as closed.
The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
initiate the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special
adapted algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful
breaker opening, that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current
detection has not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a
back-up trip is initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
202
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Current
AND
BLOCK
AND
START
t1
Current &
Contact
STIL1
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
CBCLD
TRRET
AND
Contact
L2
L3
en08000007.vsd
IEC08000007 V1 EN
Figure 96:
Internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH.
Internal logical signal PU_N has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude
larger than setting parameter Pickup_N.
7.5.8
Technical data
Table 87:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
> 95%
(2-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
> 95%
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
35 ms typically
10 ms maximum
203
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6
7.6.1
Identification
Function description
Pole discrepancy protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CCRPLD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
7.6.2
Functionality
Circuit breakers and disconnectors can end up with their phase poles in different
positions (close-open), due to electrical or mechanical failures.An open phase can
cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating
machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence
current functions.
Normally the affected breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
warrants the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.
The pole discrepancy function operates based on information from the circuit breaker
logic with additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.
7.6.3
Function block
CCRPLD (52PD)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
ANSI08000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000041 V1 EN
Figure 97:
204
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.4
Signals
Table 88:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
Close command to CB
OPENCMD
BOOLEAN
Open command to CB
EXTPDIND
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 90:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 89:
7.6.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal to CB
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Settings
CCRPLD (52PD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
ContactSel
Disabled
PD signal from CB
Disabled
CurrentSel
Disabled
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
Disabled
CurrUnsymPU
0 - 100
80
CurrRelPU
0 - 100
%IB
10
Table 91:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
205
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.6
Monitored data
Table 92:
Name
7.6.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMin
REAL
IMax
REAL
Operation principle
The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 98.
C.B.
52a
52a
52a
52b
52b
52b
ANSI_en05000287.vsd
ANSI05000287 V1 EN
Figure 98:
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current
measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase
current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest
phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting
CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started.
The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150
ms long. The current based pole discrepancy function can be set to be active either
continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
206
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
BLOCK
ContactSel
AND
EXTPDIND
AND
tTrip
t
150 ms
TRIP
OR
CLOSECMD
tTrip+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
CurrentSel
Unsymmetrical
current detection
ANSI08000014-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000014 V1 EN
Figure 99:
The pole discordance protection is blocked if the input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions.
Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a
trip signal TRIP:
7.6.7.1
207
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.7.2
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three
phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.
7.6.8
Technical data
Table 93:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0-100) %
1.0% of In
Reset ratio
>95%
Time delay
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
7.7
7.7.1
Functionality
The directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP (32)/GUPPDUP (37) can be
used wherever a high/low active, reactive or apparent power protection or alarming is
required. The functions can alternatively be used to check the direction of active or
208
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
reactive power flow in the power system. There are a number of applications where
such functionality is needed. Some of them are:
Each function has two steps with definite time delay. Reset times for both steps can be
set as well.
7.7.2
7.7.2.1
Identification
Function description
Directional overpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
GOPPDOP
IEC 60617
identification
P>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
32
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V1 EN
7.7.2.2
Function block
GOPPDOP (32)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
BFI_3P
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI08000506-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000506 V1 EN
Figure 100:
209
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.7.2.3
Signals
Table 94:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Name
Table 96:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 95:
7.7.2.4
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
REAL
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Settings
GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpMode1
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
OpMode2
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 2
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Unit
Step
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
Table 97:
Name
k
Table 98:
Name
Values (Range)
Default
Description
Unit
-
Step
Default
0.01
0.00
Step
Default
Description
Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
7.7.2.5
Monitored data
Table 99:
Name
7.7.3
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of
calculated power base value
REAL
MVAr
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of
calculated power base value
211
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.7.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GUPPDUP
P<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37
SYMBOL-LL V1 EN
7.7.3.2
Function block
GUPPDUP (37)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
BFI_3P
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI08000507-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000507 V1 EN
Figure 101:
7.7.3.3
Signals
Table 100:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 101:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
Section 7
Current protection
Name
7.7.3.4
Table 102:
Name
Type
Description
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
REAL
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Settings
GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpMode1
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
OpMode2
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 2
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
Table 103:
Name
TD
Unit
-
Step
Default
0.01
0.00
Description
Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I
213
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 104:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
7.7.3.5
Monitored data
Table 105:
Name
7.7.4
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of
calculated power base value
REAL
MVAr
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of
calculated power base value
Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 102. The function has two stages with individual settings.
214
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S( composant)
in Char angle
S( angle)
t
0
S( angle) <
Power1
TRIP1
PICKUP1
S( angle) <
Power2
t
0
TRIP2
PICKUP2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000438 V2 EN
Figure 102:
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 106.
Table 106:
S = V A I A* + VB I B* + VC I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN
Arone
S = V AB I A* - VBC IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN
PosSeq
(Equation 49)
S = VAB ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN
BC
(Equation 48)
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN
AB
(Equation 47)
(Equation 50)
S = VBC ( I B* - IC * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 51)
215
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
S = VCA ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN
S = 3 VA I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 53)
S = 3 VB I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 52)
(Equation 54)
S = 3 VC I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 55)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2).
For directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional
overpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip
TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of
the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two
stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis
for stage 1(2) is 0.5 p.u. for Power1(2) 1.0 p.u., else the hysteresis is 0.5 Power1(2).
If the measured power drops under the (Power1(2) - hysteresis) value, the over-power
function will reset after 0.06 seconds. If the measured power comes over the
(Power1(2) + hysteresis) value, the under-power function will reset after 0.06 seconds.
The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out and that the timer of the stage will
reset.
7.7.4.1
216
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = TD SOld + (1 TD ) SCalculated
(Equation 56)
EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN
Where
S
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
TD=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
7.7.5
Technical data
Table 107:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr1)
(1.0-2.0)% of SBase
(2.0-10)% of SBase
Characteristic angle
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2 degrees
Timers
(0.010 - 6000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
Power level
1)
217
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.8
7.8.1
Identification
Function description
Accidental energizing protection for
synchronous generator
7.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
AEGGAPC
IEC 60617
identification
U<I>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50AE
Functionality
Inadvertent or accidental energizing of off-line generators has occurred often enough
due to operating errors, breaker head flashovers, control circuit malfunctions, or a
combination of these causes. Inadvertently energized generator operates as induction
motor drawing a large current from the system. The voltage supervised overcurrent
protection is used to protect the inadvertently energized generator.
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator (AEGGAPC, 50AE) takes
the maximum phase current input from the generator terminal side or from generator
neutral side and maximum phase to phase voltage inputs from the terminal side.
AEGGAPC (50AE) is enabled when the terminal voltage drops below the specified
voltage level for the preset time.
7.8.3
Function block
AEGGAPC (50AE)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
RI
BLOCK
ARMED
BLKTR
ANSI09000783-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000783 V1 EN
Figure 103:
218
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.8.4
Signals
Table 108:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
Block of trip
Name
Table 110:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 109:
7.8.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
RI
BOOLEAN
Enabled
BOOLEAN
Settings
AEGGAPC (50AE) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
IPickup
2 - 900
%IB
120
tOC
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.030
27_pick_up
2 - 200
%VB
50
tArm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
59_Drop_out
2 - 200
%VB
80
tDisarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Table 111:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
Groups
219
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.8.6
Operation principle
Accidental energizing protection for synchronous generator AEGGAPC (50AE)
function is connected to three phase current input either from the generator terminal
side or from generator neutral point side and three phase voltage from the generator
terminals. The maximum of the three phase-to-phase voltages and maximum of the
three phase currents are measured.
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is less than the 27_pick_up for the period
tArm, it is ensured that the generator is off-line. The Enabled signal will initiate the
overcurrent function. If the calculated maximum current of the three phases is larger
than IPickup for the period tOC then the TRIP signal becomes activated. Also PICKUP
signal becomes activated when overcurrent is detected.
When the maximum phase-to-phase voltage is larger than 59_Drop_out for the period
tDisarm, it is ensured generator is on line. During this state, undervoltage operation is
disarmed, blocking the overcurrent operation and thus the function becomes inoperative.
BLOCK input can be used to block AEGGAPC (50AE). In addition, the BLKTR input
that blocks the TRIP signal is also present. The input BLKTR can be used if
AEGGAPC (50AE) is to be used only for monitoring purposes.
Imax_DFT
a
a>b
IPickup
tOC
AND
Operation = Enabled
TRIP
BLOCK
RI
Enabled
tArm
Uph-ph_max_DFT
a
a<b
27_pick_up
AND
ON - Delay
tDisarm
a
a>b
59_Drop_out
OUT
NOUT
OR
b
ON - Delay
ANSI09000784-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000784 V1 EN
Figure 104:
220
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.8.7
Technical data
Table 112:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate value,
overcurrent
(2-900)% of IBase
1,0% of In at I<In
1.0% of I at I>In
>95%
Transient overreach,
overcurrent function
<20% at = 100 ms
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
Operate value,
undervoltage
(2-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V<Vn
0.5% of V at V>Vn
10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
15 ms typically
Operate value,
overvoltage
(2-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V<Vn
0.5% of V at V>Vn
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
7.9
7.9.1
Identification
Function description
Negative sequence time overcurrent
protection for machines
7.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
NS2PTOC
IEC 60617
identification
2I2>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46I2
Functionality
Negative-sequence time overcurrent protection for machines NS2PTOC (46I2) is
intended primarily for the protection of generators against possible overheating of the
rotor caused by negative sequence component in the stator current.
The negative sequence currents in a generator may, among others, be caused by:
221
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Unbalanced loads
Line to line faults
Line to ground faults
Broken conductors
Malfunction of one or more poles of a circuit breaker or a disconnector
NS2PTOC (46I2) can also be used as a backup protection, that is, to protect the
generator in case line protections or circuit breakers fail to clear unbalanced system faults.
To provide an effective protection for the generator for external unbalanced conditions,
NS2PTOC (46I2) is able to directly measure the negative sequence current. NS2PTOC
(46I2) also has a time delay characteristic which matches the heating characteristic of
2
the generator I 2 t = K as defined in standard IEEE C50.13.
where:
I2
NS2PTOC (46I2) has a wide range of K settings and the sensitivity and capability of
detecting and tripping for negative sequence currents down to the continuous capability
of a generator.
A separate output is available as an alarm feature to warn the operator of a potentially
dangerous situation.
7.9.3
Function block
NS2PTOC (46I2)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
ALARM
NSCURR
ANSI08000359-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000359 V2 EN
Figure 105:
222
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.9.4
Signals
Table 113:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Name
Table 115:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 114:
7.9.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
NSCURR
REAL
Settings
NS2PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
tAlarm
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
3.00
OpStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
I2-1>
3 - 500
%IB
10
CurveType1
Definite
Inverse
Definite
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
tResetDef1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
K1
1.0 - 99.0
0.1
10.0
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
t1Max
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1000.00
ResetMultip1
0.01 - 20.00
0.01
1.00
OpStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
I2-2>
3 - 500
%IB
10
t2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
10.00
tResetDef2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Table 116:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.9.6
Default
Description
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 117:
Name
NSCURR
7.9.7
Step
Values (Range)
-
Unit
A
Description
Negative sequence current in
primary amps
Operation principle
The negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC, 46I2)
function directly measures the amplitude of the negative phase sequence component of
the measured current. NS2PTOC (46I2) sets the PICKUP, PU_ST1 or PU_ST2 outputs
active and starts to count trip time only when the measured negative sequence current
value rises above the set value of parameters I2-1> or I2-2> respectively.
To avoid oscillation in the output signals, a certain hysteresis has been included. For
both steps, the reset ratio is 0.97.
Step 1 of NS2PTOC (46I2) can operate in the Definite Time (DT) or Inverse Time
(IDMT) mode depending on the selected value for the CurveType1 parameter. If
CurveType1= Definite, NS2PTOC (46I2) operates with a Definite Time Delay
characteristic and if CurveType1 = Inverse, NS2PTOC (46I2) operates with an Inverse
224
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Time Delay characteristic. Step 2 can only operate in the Definite Time (DT) mode.
The characteristic defines the time period between the moment when measured
negative sequence current exceeds the set pickup levels in parameter I2-1> or I2-2>
until the trip signal is initiated.
Definite time delay is not dependent on the magnitude of measured negative sequence
current. Once the measured negative sequence current exceeds the set level, the
settable definite timer t1 or t2 respectively, starts to count and the corresponding trip
signal gets activated after the pre-set definite time delay has elapsed. Reset time in
definite time mode is determined by the setting parameters tResetDef1 or tResetDef2
respectively. If NS2PTOC (46I2) has already picked up but not tripped and measured
negative sequence current goes below the pickup value, the pickup outputs remains
active for the time defined by the resetting parameters.
A BLOCK input signal resets NS2PTOC (46I2) momentarily.
When the parameter CurveType1 is set to Inverse, an inverse curve is selected
according to selected value for parameter K1. The minimum trip time setting of
parameter t1Min and reset time parameter ResetMultip1 also influence step operation.
However, to match the heating characteristics of the generator, the reset time is
depending on the setting of parameter K1, which must be set according to the
generators negative sequence current capacity.
K = I 2 2t
EQUATION2112 V1 EN
Where:
I2
is negative sequence current expressed in per unit of the rated generator current
225
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Operate
time
t1Max
(Default= 1000 s)
t1Min
(Default= 5 s)
K1
Current I2-1>
IEC09000691-2-en.vsd
IEC09000691 V2 EN
Figure 106:
For a detailed description of inverse time characteristic, see chapter "Inverse time
characteristics".
The reset time is exponential and is given by the following expression:
ResetMultip
ResetTime [ s ] =
2
K1
I
NS
1
I Pickup
(Equation 57)
ANSIEQUATION2111 V1 EN
Where
INS
IPickup
ResetMultip
is multiplier of the generator capability constant K equal to setting K1 and thus defines
reset time of inverse time characteristic
226
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.9.7.1
Pickup sensitivity
The trip pickup levels Current I2-1> and I2-2> of NS2PTOC (46I2) are freely settable
over a range of 3 to 500 % of rated generator current IBase. The wide range of pickup
setting is required in order to be able to protect generators of different types and sizes.
After pickup, a certain hysteresis is used before resetting NS2PTOC (46I2). For both
steps the reset ratio is 0.97.
7.9.7.2
Alarm function
The alarm function is operated by PICKUP signal and used to warn the operator for an
abnormal situation, for example, when generator continuous negative sequence current
capability is exceeded, thereby allowing corrective action to be taken before removing
the generator from service. A settable time delay tAlarm is provided for the alarm
function to avoid false alarms during short-time unbalanced conditions.
7.9.7.3
Logic diagram
DT time
selected
Negative sequence current
t1
TRST1
OR
a>b
I2-1>
PU_ST1
AND
Inverse
Operation=Enabled
BLK1
Inverse time
selected
BLOCK
ANSI08000466-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000466 V2 EN
Figure 107:
Step 2 for Negative sequence time overcurrent protection for machines (NS2PTOC,
46I2) is similar to step 1 above except that it lacks the inverse characteristic.
227
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PICKUP
OR
tAlarm
TRST1
TRST2
ALARM
TRIP
OR
ANSI09000690-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000690 V2 EN
Figure 108:
7.9.8
Simplified logic diagram for the PICKUP, ALARM and TRIP signals for
NS2PTOC (46I2)
Technical data
Table 118:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(3-500)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In
>95%
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
Time characteristics
Definite or Inverse
Inverse time
characteristic step 1,
I 22t = K
K=1.0-99.0
Class 5 + 40 ms
K=0.01-20.00
Class 10 + 40 ms
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
Timers
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
228
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10
7.10.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
7.10.2
VR2PVOC
IEC 60617
identification
U<I>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51V
Functionality
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VR2PVOC, 51V) function is
recommended as a backup protection for generators.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level that can be used either
with definite time or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage controlled/
restrained.
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also available with the
function in order to provide funcionality for overcurrent protection with undervoltage
seal-in.
7.10.3
Function block
VR2PVOC (51V)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC
BLKUV
TRIP
TROC
27 Trip
PICKUP
PU_OC
27 PU
IMAX
VUmin
ANSI10000118-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000118 V1 EN
Figure 109:
229
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.4
Signals
Table 119:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLKOC
BOOLEAN
BLKUV
BOOLEAN
Table 120:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TROC
BOOLEAN
27 Trip
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_OC
BOOLEAN
27 PU
BOOLEAN
IMAX
REAL
VUmin
REAL
230
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.5
Table 121:
Name
Settings
VR2PVOC (51V) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
Pickup_Curr
2.0 - 5000.0
%IB
1.0
120.0
Characterist
tDef_OC
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
1.00
t_MinTripDelay
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.05
Operation_UV
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PickUp_Volt
2.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
tDef_UV
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
1.00
EnBlkLowV
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
BlkLowVolt
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
3.0
Table 122:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VDepMode
Step
Slope
Slope
VDepFact
5.0 - 100.0
0.1
25.0
VHighLimit
30.0 - 100.0
%VB
0.1
100.0
231
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 123:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.10.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 124:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMAX
REAL
VUmin
REAL
kV
7.10.7
Operation principle
7.10.7.1
Measured quantities
The voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VR2PVOC, 51V) function is
always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in the
configuration tool (ACT), but it will always measure the maximum of the three-phase
currents and the minimum of the three phase-to-phase voltages.
7.10.7.2
Base quantities
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for
VR2PVOC (51V) function.
Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase), and
primary power (SBase) are set in Global base values for the settings function
GBASVAL. Setting GlobalBaseSel is used to select a GBASVAL function for the
reference of base values.
IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.
VBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in
primary kV.
232
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.7.3
Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
with the set pickup level. The overcurrent step picks up if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is bigger than the set level.
PickupCurr
VDepFact * PickupCurr
0,25
VHighLimit
VBase
ANSI10000123-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000123 V1 EN
Figure 110:
233
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
PickupCurr
VDepFact * PickupCurr
VHighLimit
VBase
ANSI10000124-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000124 V1 EN
Figure 111:
This feature simply changes the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. This feature also affects the pickup
current value for the calculation of operate times for IDMT curves (the overcurrent
with IDMT curve operates faster during low voltage conditions).
234
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.7.4
Logic diagram
DEF time
selected
OR
MaxPhCurr
TROC
PU_OC
a>b
PickupCurr
Inverse
Inverse
time
selected
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature
MinPh-Ph Voltage
ANSI10000214-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000214 V1 EN
Figure 112:
DEF time
selected
MinPh-PhVoltage
TRUV
b>a
PickupVolt
AND
PU_UV
Operation_UV=On
BLKUV
ANSI10000213-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000213 V1 EN
Figure 113:
235
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.7.5
Undervoltage protection
The undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage
quantity with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step picks up if the magnitude of
the measured voltage quantity is smaller than the set level.
The pickup signal starts a definite time delay. If the value of the pickup signal is one
for longer than the set time delay, the undervoltage step sets its trip signal to one.
This undervoltage with additional ACT logic can be used to provide funcionality for
overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.
7.10.8
Technical data
Table 125:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pickup overcurrent
(2 - 5000)% of IBase
1.0% of Ir at I<Ir
1.0% of I at I>Ir
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
Inverse characteristics,
see table 487, table 488
and table 489
17 curves type
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
Pickup undervoltage
0.5 % of Vr
30 ms typically 2 to 0 x Vset
40 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
1.0 % of Vr
> 95%
< 105%
Overcurrent:
Critical impulse time
Impulse margin time
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
236
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1
8.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
UV2PTUV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27
2U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER THAN
V1 EN
8.1.2
Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed backup to primary protection.
UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, where step 1 is settable as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
8.1.3
Function block
UV2PTUV (27)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
ANSI09000285-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000285 V1 EN
Figure 114:
237
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.4
Signals
Table 126:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Name
Table 128:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 127:
8.1.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Settings
UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup1
1 - 100
%VB
70
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
238
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup2
1 - 100
%VB
50
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Table 129:
Name
Step
Default
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN DFT
8.1.6
Monitored data
Table 130:
Name
8.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_A
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
V_B
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
V_C
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Operation principle
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
PICKUP signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1
out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is
239
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse time delayed. Step 2 is always
definite time delayed.
UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true
RMS value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-tophase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:
Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV )
3
(Equation 58)
EQUATION1606 V1 EN
EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.7.1
Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The
parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the
PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to
be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.1.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
overcurrent (TOV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time
delay two different modes are available; inverse curve A and inverse curve B.
The type A curve is described as:
240
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
t=
TD
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
(Equation 60)
ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN
TD 480
Vpickup < -V
- 0.5
32
Vpickup <
2.0
+ 0.055
(Equation 61)
EQUATION1608 V1 EN
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of
the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 20.3 "Inverse time
characteristics".
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (TOV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, the corresponding pickup output is reset.
8.1.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) partially or
completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
8.1.7.4
BLOCK:
BLK1:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the
set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to
fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection
UV2PTUV (27) is schematically shown in Figure 115.
241
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
VL1 or VA
VL2 or VB
VL3 or VC
Comparator
V < Pickup1
Comparator
V < Pickup1
Comparator
V < Pickup1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
PU_ST1_A
Phase1
PU_ST1_B
Phase2
PU_ST1_C
Phase3 Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
PU_ST1
OR
Step1
MinVoltSelect
or
Comparator
V < Pickup2
Comparator
V < Pickup2
Comparator
V < Pickup2
Time integrator
t1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
TRST1
OR
TRIP
Phase1
PU_ST2
OR
Phase2
Phase3 Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
Step2
Timer
t2
TRIP
TRST2
OR
OR PICKUP
OR
TRIP
ANSI08000016-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000016 V1 EN
Figure 115:
242
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.8
Technical data
Table 131:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<105%
Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 491
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
15 ms typically
8.2
8.2.1
Identification
Function description
Two step overvoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OV2PTOV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59
2U>
SYMBOL-C-2U SMALLER THAN
V1 EN
8.2.2
Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines etc.
243
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV (59) has an extremely high reset ratio to allow settings close to system
service voltage.
8.2.3
Function block
OV2PTOV (59)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
ANSI09000278-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000278 V1 EN
Figure 116:
8.2.4
Signals
Table 132:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 133:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
244
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.5
Table 134:
Name
Settings
OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup1
1 - 200
%VB
120
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup2
1 - 200
%VB
150
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Table 135:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN DFT
245
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.6
Monitored data
Table 136:
Name
8.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_A
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
V_B
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
V_C
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Operation principle
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or threephase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of
3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the
set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value.
The choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phaseto-phase voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set global base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-toground voltage over:
Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV ) / 3
EQUATION1610 V2 EN
(Equation 62)
(Equation 63)
246
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.7.1
Measurement principle
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 and Pickup2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3
measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.2.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
overcurrent (TOV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time
delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
TD
V Vpickup >
Vpickup >
EQUATION1625 V2 EN
(Equation 64)
TD 480
0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN
(Equation 65)
TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN
(Equation 66)
247
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see Figure 117. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are
shown in section "Inverse time characteristics"
Voltage
Inverse Time Voltage
VA
VB
VC
Time
en05000016_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000016 V1 EN
Figure 117:
A TRIP requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time
delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and
by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If
the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, the corresponding PICKUP output is reset.
8.2.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:
BLOCK:
BLK1:
BLK2:
248
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.7.4
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input
voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the
highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is
included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP
condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) is
schematically described in Figure 118.
249
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Comparator
V > Pickup1
VL1 or VA
VL2 or VB
Comparator
V > Pickup1
VL3 or VC
Comparator
V > Pickup1
PU_ST1_A
Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
PU_ST1_B
Phase 2
PU_ST1_C
Phase 3 Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
PU_ST1
OR
Step 1
MaxVoltSelect
Comparator
V > Pickup2
Comparator
V > Pickup2
Comparator
V > Pickup2
Time integrator
t1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
TRIP
TRST1
OR
Phase 1
Phase 2
PU_ST2
OR
Phase 3 Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
Step 2
Timer
t2
TRIP
TRST2
OR
OR
OR
PICKUP
TRIP
ANSI08000012-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000012 V1 EN
Figure 118:
250
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.8
Technical data
Table 137:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio
>95%
Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 490
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
15 ms typically
8.3
8.3.1
Identification
Function description
Two step residual overvoltage
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ROV2PTOV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N
3U0>
IEC10000168 V1 EN
8.3.2
Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.
251
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.
ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
8.3.3
Function block
ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
ANSI09000273_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000273 V1 EN
Figure 119:
8.3.4
Signals
Table 138:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 139:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
252
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.5
Table 140:
Name
Settings
ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Definite time
Pickup1
1 - 200
%VB
30
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Pickup2
1 - 100
%VB
45
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Table 141:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.3.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 142:
Name
VLevel
8.3.7
Unit
Values (Range)
-
Unit
kV
Description
Magnitude of measured
voltage
Operation principle
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect high singlephase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3V0. The residual voltage can
253
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.7.1
Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 and Pickup2.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.3.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time delay
(TOV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time delay three
different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
TD
V Vpickup >
Vpickup >
EQUATION1625 V2 EN
(Equation 67)
TD 480
0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN
(Equation 68)
254
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
(Equation 69)
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
time characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (TOV).
If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, the corresponding PICKUP output is reset.
8.3.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N)
partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
8.3.7.4
BLOCK:
BLK1:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive
Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to
the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design
of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is schematically
described in Figure 120.
255
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
VN
Comparator
VN > Pickup1
PICKUP
Time integrator
t1
Comparator
VN > Pickup2
TRIP
TRST1
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 1
PU_ST2
Phase 1
PICKUP
Timer
t2
PU_ST1
Phase 1
TRIP
TRST2
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 2
OR
OR
PICKUP
TRIP
ANSI08000013-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000013 V1 EN
Figure 120:
256
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.8
Technical data
Table 143:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio
>95%
Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 492
(0.006000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
15 ms typically
8.4
8.4.1
Identification
Function description
Overexcitation protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OEXPVPH
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
24
U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN
257
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.2
Functionality
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent
parts in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating curves and
independent alarm stages.
8.4.3
Function block
OEXPVPH (24)
V3P*
BLOCK
RESET
TRIP
BFI
ALARM
ANSI09000008-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000008 V1 EN
Figure 121:
8.4.4
Signals
Table 144:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
Table 145:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
BFI
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
258
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.5
Table 146:
Name
Settings
OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Pickup1
100.0 - 180.0
%VB/f
0.1
110.0
Pickup2
100.0 - 200.0
%VB/f
0.1
140.0
t_MinTripDelay
0.005 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
TDForIEEECurve
1 - 60
AlarmPickup
50.0 - 120.0
0.1
100.0
tAlarm
0.00 - 9000.00
0.01
5.00
Step
Default
Table 147:
Name
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
VoltConn
Pos Seq
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UL2L3
UL3L1
Pos Seq
8.4.6
Monitored data
Table 148:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TMTOTRIP
REAL
VPERHZ
REAL
V/Hz
THERMSTA
REAL
259
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.7
Operation principle
The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH, 24) function is growing as
the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of
the time near their designated limits.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an
overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with
below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a transformer unit is on load,
but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence.
Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience
overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see
equation 70, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage E,
and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n Bmax A
(Equation 70)
EQUATION898 V2 EN
E f
( Vr ) ( fn )
ANSIEQUATION2296 V1 EN
(Equation 71)
Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the
core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla),
the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other (nonlaminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:
Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz (V/
Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or is not
260
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source after a delay
ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator
unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide
range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such
cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a machine, by
means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the power
transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at 10%
above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the ratio of the actual
generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed 1.1 times the ratio
of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained basis, see
equation 72.
E
f
1.1
Vn
fn
(Equation 72)
EQUATION1630 V1 EN
Pickup1
fn
(Equation 73)
ANSIEQUATION2297 V2 EN
where:
Pickup1 is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
Pickup1 is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not
know exactly what to set, then the default value for Pickup1 = 110 % for the standard
IEC 60076-1 shall be used.
In OEXPVPH (24), the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 74.
M ( p.u.) =
E f
Vn fn
ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN
(Equation 74)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Vn/fn. A power transformer is not
261
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.7.1
Measured voltage
Selected voltage signal is used by OEXPVPH (24) function. A check is made if the
Selected voltage signal is higher than 70% of rated phase-to-ground voltage, when
below this value, OEXPVPH (24) exits immediately, and no excitation is calculated.
The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in
operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 Hz and
60 Hz respectively.
8.4.7.2
0.18 TD
PUV Hz - 1
0.18 TD
overexcitation
ANSIEQUATION2298 V2 EN
(Equation 75)
where:
M
262
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Vmeasured
fmeasured
=
VBase
frated
Vmeasured
frated
VBase fmeasured
ANSIEQUATION2404 V1 EN
Inverse delays as per figure 123, can be modified (limited) by a special definite delay
setting t_MinTripDelay, see figure 122.
delay in s
t_MaxTrip
Delay
under excitation
overexcitation
t_MinTripDelay
0
M=Pickup1
Pickup1
Mmax Pickup1
Mmax
Emax
Overexcitation M-Pickup1
Excitation M
E (only if f = fn = const)
ANSI99001067-2en.vsd
ANSI99001067 V2 EN
Figure 122:
A definite maximum time of 1800 seconds can be used to limit the operate time at low
degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than 1800 seconds will not be allowed.
In case the inverse delay is longer than 1800 seconds, OEXPVPH (24) trips.
A definite minimum time, t_MinTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at
high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than
t_MinTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24) function trips after t_MinTripDelay seconds. The
inverse delay law is not valid for values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin,
irrespective of the overexcitation level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>Pickup1).
263
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Time (s)
1000
100
TD = 60
TD = 20
TD = 10
TD = 9
TD = 8
TD = 7
TD = 6
TD = 5
10
TD = 4
TD = 3
TD = 2
TD = 1
1
10
20
OVEREXCITATION IN %
30
40
(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000373 V1 EN
Figure 123:
The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH (24) setting
Pickup2. Pickup2 can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency voltage, where the
inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, t_MinTripDelay. If, for
example, Pickup2 = 140 %, then M is according to equation 76.
M=
( Pickup2 f )
Vn/fn
ANSIEQUATION2286 V1 EN
= 1.40
(Equation 76)
264
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.7.3
Cooling
Overexcitation protection function (OEXPVPH, 24) is basically a thermal protection;
therefore a cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is
applied, with a default time constant of 20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and
frequency return to normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is
assumed to be reached not before approximately 5 times the default time constant of 20
minutes. If an overexcitation condition would return before that, the time to trip will be
shorter than it would be otherwise.
8.4.7.4
E f
Vn fn
ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN
(Equation 77)
If VPERHZ value is less than settingPickup1 (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to Pickup1 (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to
the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than Pickup1, the
protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while
Pickup1 = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous
excitation limit.
Monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected power
transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip value
which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time, as
TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some
reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, is limited by t_MinTripDelay, then THERMSTA will
generally not reach 100% at the same time, as TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For
example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long delay is limited by 30
minutes, then the TRIP output signal of OEXPVPH (24) will be set to 1 before
THERMSTA reaches 100%.
265
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.7.5
Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmPickup, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2%
lower than (Pickup1) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator
an early abnormal voltages warning.
8.4.7.6
Logic diagram
BLOCK
AlarmPickup
t>tAlarm
t>tMin
t
Pickup1
Calculation
Ei
of internal
induced
voltage Ei
M=
(Ei / f)
(Vn / fn)
AND
TRIP
tMin
TD
ALARM
tAlarm
M>Pickup1
V3P
AND
TDForIEEE
1800 s
t
M>Pickup2
Pickup2
Figure 124:
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE delays are calculated. The cooling
process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and frequency are separately checked
against their respective limit values.
8.4.8
Technical data
Table 149:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(100180)% of (VBase/fn)
0.5% of V
0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(100200)% of (VBase/fn)
0.5% of V
266
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Function
Curve type
Range or value
Accuracy
IEEE
Class 5 + 40 ms
IEEE : t =
(0.18 TD)
( M - 1) 2
EQUATION1645 V1 EN
(Equation 78)
where M = (E/f)/(Vn/fn)
Minimum time delay for inverse
function
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
8.5
8.5.1
Identification
Function description
100% Stator ground fault protection,
3rd harmonic based
8.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
STEFPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59THD
Functionality
Stator ground fault is a fault type having relatively high fault rate. The generator
systems normally have high impedance grounding, that is, grounding via a neutral
point resistor. This resistor is normally dimensioned to give an ground fault current in
the range 3 15 A at a solid ground-fault directly at the generator high voltage
terminal. The relatively small ground fault currents give much less thermal and
mechanical stress on the generator, compared to the short circuit case, which is
between conductors of two phases. Anyhow, the ground faults in the generator have to
be detected and the generator has to be tripped, even if longer fault time compared to
internal short circuits, can be allowed.
In normal non-faulted operation of the generating unit the neutral point voltage is close
to zero, and there is no zero sequence current flow in the generator. When a phase-toground fault occurs the neutral point voltage will increase and there will be a current
flow through the neutral point resistor.
To detect a ground fault on the windings of a generating unit one may use a neutral
point overvoltage protection, a neutral point overcurrent protection, a zero sequence
overvoltage protection or a residual differential protection. These protections are
simple and have served well during many years. However, at best these simple
267
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
schemes protect only 95% of the stator winding. They leave 5% close to the neutral
end unprotected. Under unfavorable conditions the blind zone may extend up to 20%
from the neutral.
The 95% stator ground fault protection measures the fundamental frequency voltage
component in the generator star point and it operates when it exceeds the preset value.
By applying this principle approximately 95% of the stator winding can be protected.
In order to protect the last 5% of the stator winding close to the neutral end the 3rd
harmonic voltage measurement can be performed. In 100% Stator E/F 3rd harmonic
protection either the 3rd harmonic voltage differential principle, the neutral point 3rd
harmonic undervoltage principle or the terminal side 3rd harmonic overvoltage
principle can be applied. However, differential principle is strongly recommended.
Combination of these two measuring principles provides coverage for entire stator
winding against ground faults.
stator winding
N
x E3
(1- x) E3
RN
uN
Samples of the
neutral voltage
from which the
fundamental and
3rd harmonic
voltages are
filtered out
CB 1
Transformer
Rf
CB 2
1- x
1 or 100 %
Neutral point fundamental frequency
over-voltage protection 5% - 100%
uT
Samples of the
terminal voltage
from which the
3rd harmonic
voltage is filtered
out
3rd
harmonic
Differential
differential
0% 30%
0% - 30%
ANSI10000202-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000202 V1 EN
Figure 125:
268
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.5.3
Function block
STEFPHIZ (59THD)
NEUTVOLT*
TRIP
TERMVOLT*
TRIP3H
52A
TRIP_VN
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLOCK3RD
PU_3H
BLOCKVN
PU_VN
DV3
BV3
ANSI07000033 -3-en.vsd
ANSI07000033 V3 EN
Figure 126:
8.5.4
Signals
Table 150:
Name
Default
Description
NEUTVOLT
GROUP
SIGNAL
TERMVOLT
GROUP
SIGNAL
52a
BOOLEAN
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
BLOCK3RD
BOOLEAN
BLOCKVN
BOOLEAN
Table 151:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP3H
BOOLEAN
TRIP_VN
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_3H
BOOLEAN
PU_VN
BOOLEAN
DV3
REAL
BV3
REAL
269
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.5.5
Table 152:
Name
Settings
STEFPHIZ (59THD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
Beta
0.50 - 10.00
0.01
3.00
CBexists
No
Yes
No
FactorCBopen
1.00 - 10.00
0.01
1.00
VN3rdHPU
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
VT3BlkLevel
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
VNFundPU
1.0 - 50.0
0.1
5.0
t3rdH
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tVNFund
0.020 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
Table 153:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
TVoltType
NoVoltage
ResidualVoltage
AllThreePhases
PhaseA
PhaseB
PhaseC
ResidualVoltage
270
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.5.6
Monitored data
Table 154:
Name
8.5.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VT3
REAL
kV
VN3
REAL
kV
E3
REAL
kV
ANGLE
REAL
deg
DV3
REAL
kV
BV3
REAL
kV
V_N
REAL
kV
Operation principle
The protection is a combination of the 95% fundamental frequency ground fault
protection and the100% Stator ground fault protection, 3 rd harmonic based,
(STEFPHIZ, 59THD). The 3rd harmonic based 100% stator ground fault protection is
using the 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator itself. To assure reliable
function of the protection it is necessary that the 3rd harmonic voltage generation is at
least 0.8 V RMS on VT secondary side.
The 3rd harmonic voltage generated by the generator has the same phase angle in the
three phases. It has the characteristic of a zero sequence component. If the generator is
connected to the power system via a block transformer that cannot transform zero
sequence voltages between the voltage levels, the 3rd harmonic voltage, that is V3N and
V3T in fig 127, in the generator system is not influenced by the external power system.
At normal operation the generator third harmonic voltage characteristic can be
described as in figure 127.
Note that angle between V3N and V3T is typically close to 180.
271
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
V3
- DV3 +
+
V3T,A
-
V3N
+
V3T,B
-
+
V3T,C
-
V3T
V3N
en06000448_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000448 V1 EN
Figure 127:
272
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
(Equation 79)
V3N, and V3T are third harmonic phasors with real and imaginary parts. The factor Beta
must be set not to risk operation under non-faulted conditions.
The voltage V3N is measured via a voltage transformer between the generator neutral
point and ground. The voltage V3T can be measured in different ways. The setting
TVoltType defines how the protection function is fed from voltage transformers at the
high voltage side of the generator. (If V3T is lower than the set level VT3BlkLevel,
STEFPHIZ (59THD) function is blocked. The choices of TVoltType are:
NoVoltage: There is no voltage measured from the generator terminal side. This can be
the case when there are only phase-to-phase voltage transformers available at the
generator terminal side. In this case the protection will operate as a simple neutral point
3rd harmonic undervoltage protection, which must be blocked externally during
generator start-up and shut-down.
ResidualVoltage: The function is fed from a broken delta connection of the phase to
ground connected voltage transformers at the generator terminal side,
V3T=(1/3)*V_Broken_Delta.
AllThreePhases: The function is fed from the three phase to ground connected voltage
transformers at the generator terminal side. The 3rd harmonic voltage V3T is calculated
in the IED, V3T=(1/3)*(V3A+V3B+V3C).
PhaseA, PhaseB, or PhaseC: The function is fed from one phase voltage transformer
only. The 3rd harmonic zero sequence voltage is assumed to be equal to any of the
phase voltages, as the third harmonic voltage is of zero sequence type, V3T=V3Lx.
A simplified block diagram describing the stator ground fault protection function
shown in figure 128.
273
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Samples:
Generator
terminal
voltage
3rd
harmonic
Fourier
filtering
giving VT3
Samples:
Generator
neutral point
voltage
3rd
harmonic
Fourier
filtering
giving VN3
Complex VT3
Stator
Ground
Fault
detection
3rd
harmonic
based
TRIP
TRIP3H
Pickup
Pickup
and trip
logic
TRIPVN
PU3H
PU_VN
Complex VN3
Pickup
Stator
Ground
Fault
detection
95 %
Pickup
CB Status
Block
ANSI10000240-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000240 V1 EN
Figure 128:
274
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Beta
V3N+V3T
V3N
ab
PU3H
AND
t
0
VT3BlkLevel
V3T
ab
TRIP3H
PICKUP
OR
TRIP
OR
a
VNFundPU
V_N
PU_VN
ba
TRIPVN
t
0
en07000001_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000001 V1 EN
Figure 129:
There are two different cases of generator block configuration; with or without
generator circuit breaker. If there is no generator breaker the capacitive coupling to
ground is the same under all operating conditions. When there is a generator breaker,
the capacitive coupling to ground differs between the operating conditions when the
generator is running with the generator breaker open (before synchronization) and with
the circuit breaker closed. This can be shown as in figure 130.
-
UV3
- DV3 +
+
V3T,A
-
V3N
+
V3T,B
-
+
V3T,C
-
Ctr/3
Ctr/3
Ctr/3
en07000002-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000002 V2 EN
Figure 130:
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
With the circuit breaker open, the total capacitance will be smaller compared to normal
operating conditions. This means that the neutral point 3rd harmonic voltage will be
reduced compared to the normal operating condition. Therefore, there is a possibility to
reduce the sensitivity of the protection when the generator circuit breaker is open.
With the setting CBexists change of the sensitivity is enabled. If the binary input signal
52a is activated the set sensitivity is valid. If the generator circuit breaker is opened the
binary input 52a is deactivated and the sensitivity is changed. This is done by changing
the factor Beta which is multiplied with a set constant FactorCBopen.
In addition to the binary outputs also some analog outputs are available from the
protection function in order to enable easier commissioning:
E3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage induced in the stator given in primary volts
VN3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the neutral point of the
generator
VT3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic voltage measured in the terminal point of the
generator
ANGLE: the angle between the phasors VN3 and VT3 given in radians
DV3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic differential voltage
BV3: the magnitude of the 3rd harmonic bias voltage
V_N: the fundamental frequency voltage measured in the neutral point of the generator
8.5.8
Technical data
Table 155:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1.050.0)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(0.510.0)% of VBase
5.0% of Vn
(0.110.0)% of VBase
5.0% of Vn
Timers
(0.02060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
Filter characteristic:
Fundamental
Third harmonic
276
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.1
9.1.1
Identification
Function description
Underfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPTUF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
9.1.2
Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used for load shedding systems, remedial
action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
SAPTUF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
9.1.3
Function block
SAPTUF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
ANSI09000282-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000282 V1 EN
Figure 131:
277
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.1.4
Signals
Table 156:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 158:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 157:
9.1.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SAPTUF (81) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
PUFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
48.80
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
49.90
9.1.6
Monitored data
Table 159:
Name
FREQ
9.1.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Hz
Description
Measured frequency
Operation principle
Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF, 81) function is used to detect low power system
frequency. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
278
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the
preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in
the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is
issued.
9.1.7.1
Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is dependent
on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting
MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is set as a percentage of
a global base voltage parameter, SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and the output
BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the setting of the
global parameter VBase.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.1.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for SAPTUF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the
setting tDelay.
Trip signal issuing requires that the under frequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a defined reset time, the
PICKUP output is reset.
On the RESTORE output of SAPTUF (81) a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency returns to the
level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
9.1.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) completely, by binary
input signal:
BLOCK:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function, both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
279
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.1.7.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power systems. When the
frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is
issued after the time delay tRestore. The design of Under frequency protection
SAPTUF (81) is schematically described in figure 132.
BLOCK
OR
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
freqNotValid
Frequency
Comparator
f < PUFrequency
DefiniteTimeDelay
PICKUP
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TRIP
100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
ANSI09000034-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000034 V1 EN
Figure 132:
9.1.8
Technical data
Table 160:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
(45 - 65) Hz
2.0 mHz
280
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.000-60.000)s
<250 ms
(0.000-60.000)s
<150 ms
9.2
9.2.1
Identification
Function description
Overfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPTOF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
9.2.2
Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network. Close
to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause over frequency.
SAPTOF (81) is used mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It
is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring.
SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
9.2.3
Function block
SAPTOF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
BFI
BLKDMAGN
ANSI09000280-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000280 V1 EN
Figure 133:
281
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.2.4
Signals
Table 161:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 163:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 162:
9.2.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
BFI
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SAPTOF (81) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PUFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
51.20
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
9.2.6
Monitored data
Table 164:
Name
FREQ
9.2.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Hz
Description
Measured frequency
Operation principle
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system
frequency. SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains
above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower
282
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and
no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.
9.2.7.1
Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. Over frequency protection SAPTOF
(81) is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below
the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI preprocessing function, which is set as a
percentage of a global base voltage parameter VBase, SAPTOF (81) is blocked, and the
output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the global
parameter VBase. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has
been included.
9.2.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the
setting tDelay.
TRIP signal issuing requires that the over frequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a defined reset time, the
PICKUP output is reset.
9.2.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Over frequency protection (SAPTOF, 81) completely, by binary
input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function Signal Matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), both the PICKUP and
the TRIP outputs, are blocked.
9.2.7.4
Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The
design of Over frequency protection (SAPTOF, 81) is schematically described in
figure 134.
283
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
BLOCK
BLOCK
Frequency
BLKDMAGN
OR
freqNotValid
Comparator
f > PUFrequency
TimeDlyOperate
PICKUP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TRIP
TRIP
ANSI09000033-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000033 V1 EN
Figure 134:
9.2.8
Technical data
Table 165:
Function
9.3
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz at
symmetrical threephase voltage
Timer
(0.000-60.000)s
<250 ms
284
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPFRC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
9.3.2
Functionality
Rate-of-change frequency protection function (SAPFRC,81) gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) can be used for generation
shedding, load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate
between positive or negative change of frequency.
SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
9.3.3
Function block
SAPFRC (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
ANSI09000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000281 V1 EN
Figure 135:
9.3.4
Signals
Table 166:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
285
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
Table 167:
Name
9.3.5
Table 168:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SAPFRC (81) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
PUFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
Hz/s
0.01
0.50
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
49.90
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
9.3.6
Operation principle
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC (81) has a
settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set
value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the
TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value,
for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at
low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from
the preprocessing function that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage
in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal
is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
9.3.6.1
Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. Rate-of-change
frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing
286
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
function, which is set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC (81)
is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting
PUFreqGrad, controls if SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in
frequency. If SAPFRC (81) is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting
PUFreqGrad has been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a
100 ms pulse is issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a
value higher than the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets
SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and TRIP for frequency increases.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.3.6.2
Time delay
SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.
Trip signal issuing requires that SAPFRC (81) condition continues for at least the user
set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a defined reset time, the
PICKUP output is reset after the reset time has elapsed.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the
restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality
is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if
a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the
settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
287
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.3.6.3
Design
BLOCK
OR
BLOCK
BLKDMAGN
freqNotValid
Rate-of-Change
of Frequency
Comparator
If
[PUFreqGrad<0
AND
df/dt < PUFreqGrad]
OR
[PUFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > PUFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
tTrip
TRIP
100 ms
Frequency
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
RESTORE
tRestore
ANSI08000009_en_1.vsd
ANSI08000009 V1 EN
Figure 136:
9.3.7
Technical data
Table 169:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
(45.00 - 65.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
Timers
(0.000 - 60.000) s
<130 ms
288
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Section 10
10.1
10.1.1
Identification
Function description
Fuse failure supervision
10.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
SDDRFUF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF) is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might
occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different algorithms, negative
sequence and zero sequence based algorithms and an additional delta voltage and delta
current algorithm.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated
or high-impedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage without the presence of the negative-sequence
current 3I2.
The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or
low impedance grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3V0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in
practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation modes
makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative
sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.
289
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.1.3
Function block
SDDRFUF
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
52A
MCBOP
89B
BLKZ
BLKV
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH
ANSI08000220-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000220 V1 EN
Figure 137:
10.1.4
Signals
Table 170:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
52a
BOOLEAN
MCBOP
BOOLEAN
89b
BOOLEAN
Table 171:
Name
Description
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKV
BOOLEAN
General pickup
3PH
BOOLEAN
Three-phase pickup
DLD1PH
BOOLEAN
DLD3PH
BOOLEAN
290
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.1.5
Table 172:
Name
Settings
SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OpModeSel
Disabled
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
V0I0
3V0PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
3I0PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
3V2PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
3I2PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
OpDVDI
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DVPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
DIPU
1 - 100
%IB
15
VPPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
50P
1 - 100
%IB
10
SealIn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
VSealInPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
IDLDPU
1 - 100
%IB
VDLDPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
Table 173:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
291
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.1.6
Monitored data
Table 174:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0
REAL
3I2
REAL
Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3V0
REAL
kV
3V2
REAL
kV
Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage
10.1.7
Operation principle
10.1.7.1
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU,
3V2PU and 3I2PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative
sequence current is below the set value 3I2PU.
A drop off delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two
line ends.
292
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Sequence Detection
3I0PU
IA
CurrZeroSeq
Zero
sequence
filter
IB
3I0
a
b
a>b
100 ms
t
3I2
Negative
sequence
filter
IC
a
b
3I2PU
CurrNegSeq
a>b
100 ms
t
AND
AND
3V0PU
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
FuseFailDetNegSeq
VoltZeroSeq
VA
Zero
sequence
filter
VB
Negative
sequence
filter
VC
a
b
3V0
a>b
VoltNegSeq
a
b
3V2
a>b
3V2PU
ANSI10000036-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000036 V1 EN
Figure 138:
The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local
HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.
10.1.7.2
293
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above VPPU for more than
1.5 cycle
The magnitude of DV is higher than the corresponding setting DVPU
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DIPU
The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting 50P
The circuit breaker is closed (52a = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high
current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is used to
reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low,
a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by
current change and a false fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at
the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and
energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse
failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to be an
important disadvantage, connect the 52a input to FALSE. In this way only the first
criterion can activate the delta function.
294
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
DVDI Detection
DVDI detection Phase 1
IA
One cycle
delay
|DI|
a
b
DIPU
VA
a>b
One cycle
delay
|DV|
a
b
DVPU
a
b
VPPU
IB
a>b
20 ms
t
a>b
AND
1.5 cycle
t
VB
IC
VC
VA
a
b
IA
50P
a
b
a<b
a>b
AND
52A
VB
a
b
IB
AND
a
b
a
b
IC
a
b
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
VC
OR
OR
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
FuseFailDetDVDI
Reclosing_Reclaim_and_Inhibit_timers%3DANSI100
00257%3D1%3Den%3DOriginal[1].vsd
ANSI10000034 V1 EN
Figure 139:
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.1.7.3
a
b
IB
a
b
IC
a
b
a<b
AllCurrLow
AND
a<b
a<b
IDLDPU
VA
DeadLineDet1Ph
a
b
VB
a
b
VC
a
b
a<b
a<b
AND
OR
AND
AND
a<b
DLD1PH
AND
DLD3PH
AND
AND
VDLDPU
intBlock
ANSI0000035-1-en.vsd
ANSI0000035 V1 EN
Figure 140:
10.1.7.4
Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 141. The fuse failure
supervision function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to Enabled or Disabled.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode
selector, OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different
operation modes are:
296
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
V0I0 OR V2I2; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in
parallel in an OR-condition
V0I0 AND V2I2; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in
series (AND-condition for operation)
OptimZsNs; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated)
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled.
When selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,
FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released,
the function will activate the output signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be
activated as well if not the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is activated
at the same time. The output BLKV can be used for blocking voltage related measuring
functions (under voltage protection, synchro-check, and so on). For blocking of
impedance protection functions output BLKZ shall be used.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is
below the set value VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated
as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase
voltages drop below the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to
Enabled also the output signal 3PH will be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKV and
BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value
VSealInPU.
If SealIn is set to Enabled fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in
the IED. At start-up (due to auxiliary power interruption or re-start due to configuration
change) the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and re-establishes
the conditions present before the shut down. All phase voltages must became above
VSealInPU before fuse failure is de-activated and inhibits the block of different
protection functions.
The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase
currents are below the setting IDLDPU (operate level for dead line detection) and the
circuit breaker is closed (input 52a is activated).
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary
circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of
OpModeSel or OpDVDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence
297
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
The input BLOCK is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
298
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
intBlock
OR
AND
AND
AND
SealIn = Enabled
3PH
AND
Any VP < VsealInPU
FuseFailDetDVDI
AND
OpDVDI = Enabled
OR
5s
t
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
V2I2
V0I0
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq
OR
V0I0 OR V2I2
OpModeSel
AND
a>b
AND
200 ms
t
DeadLineDet1Ph
AND
150 ms
t
MCBOP
60 sec
t
VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
BLKZ
BLKV
AND
5 sec
t
AllCurrLow
52a
89b
ANSI10000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000041 V1 EN
299
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Figure 141:
10.1.8
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic
Technical data
Table 175:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-100)% of VBase
1.0% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(1100)% of VBase
5.0% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
5.0% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Un
(1-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Un
(1-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
10.2
10.2.1
Identification
Function description
Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring
10.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
TCSSCBR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The trip circuit monitoring function TCSSCBR is designed for supervision of control
circuits. A fault in a control circuit is detected by using a dedicated output contact that
contains the monitoring functionality.
The function picks up and trips when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure. The trip
time characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type. The function trips
after a predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears.
300
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.2.3
Function block
GUID-6F85BD70-4D18-4A00-A410-313233025F3A V2 EN
Figure 142:
10.2.4
Function block
Signals
Table 176:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Type
ALARM
Table 178:
Name
Description
TCS_STATE
Table 177:
10.2.5
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
TCSSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tDelay
0.020 - 300.000
0.001
3.000
10.2.6
Operation principle
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable.
The operation of trip circuit monitoring can be described by using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
301
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
GUID-9D3B79CB-7E06-4260-B55F-B7FA004CB2AC V1 EN
Figure 143:
To protect the trip circuit supervision circuits in the IED, the output
contacts are provided with parallel transient voltage suppressors. The
breakdown voltage of these suppressors is 400 +/ 20 V DC.
Timer
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output and resets the internal timer.
10.2.7
Technical data
Table 179:
Function
Operate time delay
Range or value
(0.020 - 300.000) s
Accuracy
0,5% 110 ms
302
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Section 11
Control
11.1
11.1.1
Identification
Function description
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SESRSYN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
25
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
11.1.2
Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN, 25) function checks
that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least
one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus
arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.
For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided.
The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used
for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchronism check and lower than a
set maximum level for the synchronizing function.
303
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.3
Function block
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1*
SYNOK
V3PB2*
AUTOSYOK
V3PL1*
AUTOENOK
BLOCK
MANSYOK
BLKSYNCH
MANENOK
BLKSC
TSTSYNOK
BLKENERG
TSTAUTSY
BUS1_OP
TSTMANSY
BUS1_CL
TSTENOK
BUS2_OP
VSELFAIL
BUS2_CL
B1SEL
LNQOPEN
B2SEL
LNQCLD
LNSEL
VB1OK
SYNPROGR
VB1FF
SYNFAIL
VB2OK
FRDIFSYN
VB2FF
FRDERIVA
VLNOK
VOKSC
VLNFF
VDIFFSC
STARTSYN
FRDIFFA
TSTSYNCH
PHDIFFA
TSTSC
FRDIFFM
TSTENERG
PHDIFFM
AENMODE
VDIFFME
MENMODE
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI08000219 V1 EN
Figure 144:
11.1.4
Signals
Table 180:
Name
Default
Description
V3PB1
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3PB2
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3PL1
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Block synchronizing
BLKSC
BOOLEAN
BLKENERG
BOOLEAN
BUS1_OP
BOOLEAN
BUS1_CL
BOOLEAN
BUS2_OP
BOOLEAN
304
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
BUS2_CL
BOOLEAN
LNQOPEN
BOOLEAN
LNQCLD
BOOLEAN
VB1OK
BOOLEAN
VB1FF
BOOLEAN
VB2OK
BOOLEAN
VB2FF
BOOLEAN
VLNOK
BOOLEAN
VLNFF
BOOLEAN
STARTSYN
BOOLEAN
Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH
BOOLEAN
TSTSC
BOOLEAN
TSTENERG
BOOLEAN
AENMODE
INTEGER
MENMODE
INTEGER
Table 181:
Name
Description
SYNOK
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK
BOOLEAN
Auto synchronism-check OK
AUTOENOK
BOOLEAN
MANSYOK
BOOLEAN
Manual synchronism-check OK
MANENOK
BOOLEAN
TSTSYNOK
BOOLEAN
TSTAUTSY
BOOLEAN
TSTMANSY
BOOLEAN
TSTENOK
BOOLEAN
VSELFAIL
BOOLEAN
B1SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus1 selected
B2SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus2 selected
LNSEL
BOOLEAN
Line selected
SYNPROGR
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing failed
FRDIFSYN
BOOLEAN
FRDERIVA
BOOLEAN
VOKSC
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
11.1.5
Table 182:
Name
Type
Description
VDIFFSC
BOOLEAN
FRDIFFA
BOOLEAN
PHDIFFA
BOOLEAN
FRDIFFM
BOOLEAN
PHDIFFM
BOOLEAN
VDIFFME
REAL
FRDIFFME
REAL
PHDIFFME
REAL
MODEAEN
INTEGER
MODEMEN
INTEGER
Settings
SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
PhaseShift
-180 - 180
Deg
Phase shift
VRatio
0.20 - 5.00
0.01
1.00
Voltage ratio
OperationSynch
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
Hz
0.001
0.010
FreqDiffMax
0.050 - 0.250
Hz
0.001
0.200
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
Hz/s
0.001
0.300
tBreaker
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.080
tClosePulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tMaxSynch
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
600.00
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
OperationSC
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
VDiffSC
2.0 - 50.0
%VB
1.0
15.0
FreqDiffA
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
306
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Step
Default
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
PhaseDiffM
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
tSCA
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tSCM
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
AutoEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
DBLL
ManEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
Both
ManEnergDBDL
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Table 183:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
MeasVoltLine1
UL1
UL1L2
PosSeq
UL1
MeasVoltBus1
UL1
UL1L2
PosSeq
UL1
MeasVoltBus2
UL1
UL1L2
PosSeq
UL1
11.1.6
Monitored data
Table 184:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VDIFFME
REAL
kV
Calculated difference in
voltage
FRDIFFME
REAL
Hz
Calculated difference in
frequency
PHDIFFME
REAL
deg
Calculated difference of
phase angle
307
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.7
Operation principle
11.1.7.1
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured
conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to
give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the
closing circuit.
For single circuit breaker arrangements, SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the
capability to make the necessary voltage selection. The selection of correct voltage is
made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
settings with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.
11.1.7.2
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchronism check function for
evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phaseneutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting,
which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.
The function compares bus and line values with the set values for acceptable
frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA, FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA,
PhaseDiffM and VDiffSC. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different
voltages on the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the
comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference
308
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the
set value.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
Synchronism check function and block of the Synchronism check function
respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled
conditions are connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.
VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM,
PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and
phase angle difference conditions are met.
309
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
AND
TSTAUTSY
TSTSC
BLKSC
BLOCK
AND
OR
AND
AUTOSYOK
0-60 s
t
AND
tSCA
VDiffSC
AND
50 ms
t
VOKSC
AND
Vbase
1
FreqDiffA
PhaseDiffA
voltageDifferenceValue
frequencyDifferenceValue
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
VDIFFSC
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
VDIFFME
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
ANSI08000018_1_en.vsd
ANSI08000018 V1 EN
Figure 145:
11.1.7.3
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.
The function compares the values for the bus and line voltage which is a supervision
that the voltages are both live. If both sides are live, the measured values are compared
with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of frequency, phase angle
and voltage difference.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to
be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function
310
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch
time. This prevents that the functions are, by mistake, maintained in operation for a
long time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
function respective of the synchronizing part. TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the
function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate output.
SESRSYN (25)
OPERATION SYNCH
Disabled
Enabled
TEST MODE
Disabled
Enabled
STARTSYN
AND
BLOCK
BLKSYNCH
OR
AND
S
R
SYNPROGR
SYNOK
AND
OR
FreqDiffMax
OR
TSTSYNOK
AND
FreqDiffMin
FreqRateChange
fBus&fLine 5 Hz
AND
tClose
Pulse
tMax
Synch
SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=closing angle
ANSI08000020_1_en.vsd
ANSI08000020 V1 EN
Figure 146:
11.1.7.4
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by
the Synchronism check function.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
311
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.7.5
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer
fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and
determines the parameters fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing
check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages
and fuse supervision.
The default voltages used will be VLine and VBus1. This is also the case when
external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for the used inputs must
also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to
supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an
inverter for one of the positions.
11.1.7.6
312
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the VLNOK and VLNFF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the
binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of
the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check
function is blocked. The synchronism check function requires full voltage on both
sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.
11.1.7.7
313
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
B1SEL
AND
bus1Voltage
busVoltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
AND
OR
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
VLNOK
VLNFF
OR
OR
AND
selectedFuseOK
AND
VSELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
SESRSYN__Logic_diagram_for_the_v
oltageselectionfunctionofa
singlecircuit.vsd
ANSI08000019 V1 EN
Figure 147:
11.1.8
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
Technical data
Table 185:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
0.2 to 5.0
(0.003-1.000) Hz
2.0 mHz
(5.0-90.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
0.5% of Vn
314
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
11.2
Apparatus control
11.2.1
Functionality
The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is
given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchronism check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not
supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the
resulting position is supervised.
11.2.2
11.2.2.1
Identification
Function description
Bay control
11.2.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
QCBAY
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote
control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also
provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the
bay.
315
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.2.2.3
Function block
QCBAY
LR_OFF
LR_LOC
LR_REM
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
PSTO
UPD_BLKD
CMD_BLKD
LOC
REM
IEC09000080_1_en.vsd
IEC09000080 V1 EN
Figure 148:
11.2.2.4
Signals
Table 186:
Name
Type
LR_LOC
BOOLEAN
LR_REM
BOOLEAN
LR_VALID
BOOLEAN
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 188:
Name
AllPSTOValid
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 187:
11.2.2.5
Default
LR_OFF
Type
Description
PSTO
INTEGER
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
CMD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
LOC
BOOLEAN
REM
BOOLEAN
Settings
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Priority
No priority
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Priority
Description
Priority of originators
316
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.2.3
11.2.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Local remote
11.2.3.2
IEC 60617
identification
LOCREM
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control (QCBAY)
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.
11.2.3.3
Function block
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
LOCCTRL
REMCTRL
LHMICTRL
OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
VALID
IEC09000076_1_en.vsd
IEC09000076 V1 EN
Figure 149:
11.2.3.4
Signals
Table 189:
Name
Default
Description
CTRLOFF
BOOLEAN
Disable control
LOCCTRL
BOOLEAN
Local in control
REMCTRL
BOOLEAN
Remote in control
LHMICTRL
INTEGER
LHMI control
Table 190:
Name
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
Control is disabled
LOCAL
BOOLEAN
REMOTE
BOOLEAN
VALID
BOOLEAN
317
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.2.3.5
Table 191:
Name
ControlMode
Settings
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch
Unit
Step
Default
Internal LR-switch
Description
Control mode for internal/external LR-switch
11.2.4
11.2.4.1
Identification
Function description
Local remote control
11.2.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
LOCREMCTRL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control (QCBAY)
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.
11.2.4.3
Function block
LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1
^HMICTR1
^PSTO2
^HMICTR2
^PSTO3
^HMICTR3
^PSTO4
^HMICTR4
^PSTO5
^HMICTR5
^PSTO6
^HMICTR6
^PSTO7
^HMICTR7
^PSTO8
^HMICTR8
^PSTO9
^HMICTR9
^PSTO10
^HMICTR10
^PSTO11
^HMICTR11
^PSTO12
^HMICTR12
IEC09000074_1_en.vsd
IEC09000074 V1 EN
Figure 150:
318
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.2.4.4
Signals
Table 192:
Name
Type
Default
Description
PSTO1
INTEGER
PSTO2
INTEGER
PSTO3
INTEGER
PSTO4
INTEGER
PSTO5
INTEGER
PSTO6
INTEGER
PSTO7
INTEGER
PSTO8
INTEGER
PSTO9
INTEGER
PSTO10
INTEGER
PSTO11
INTEGER
PSTO12
INTEGER
Table 193:
Name
11.2.4.5
Description
HMICTR1
INTEGER
HMICTR2
INTEGER
HMICTR3
INTEGER
HMICTR4
INTEGER
HMICTR5
INTEGER
HMICTR6
INTEGER
HMICTR7
INTEGER
HMICTR8
INTEGER
HMICTR9
INTEGER
HMICTR10
INTEGER
HMICTR11
INTEGER
HMICTR12
INTEGER
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
319
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.2.5
Operation principle
11.2.5.1
The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are
here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level
and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is normally situated on the control/
protection IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity
information are connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is
mounted separately on the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local
level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO
output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to table 194. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that
affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LRswitch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is
permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the
external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch
that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 194:
Local panel switch
positions
AllPSTOValid
(configuration
parameter)
0 = Off
--
1 = Local
FALSE
Local Panel
1 = Local
TRUE
Section 11
Control
PSTO value
AllPSTOValid
(configuration
parameter)
2 = Remote
FALSE
Remote level
2 = Remote
TRUE
3 = Faulty
--
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within
a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related
to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850
81). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no
outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional
and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
11.2.5.2
321
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LR_ VALID
LOC
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO10
HMICTR10
PSTO11
HMICTR11
PSTO12
HMICTR12
IEC 09000208_1_en. vsd
IEC09000208 V2 EN
Figure 151:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
11.3
11.3.1
Identification
Function description
Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation
IEC 61850
identification
SLGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
322
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3.2
Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function
(SLGGIO) (or the selector switch function block) is used to get a selector switch
functionality similar to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions
operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance
issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector
switches eliminate all these problems.
11.3.3
Function block
SLGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN
^P01
^P02
^P03
^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
IEC09000091_1_en.vsd
IEC09000091 V1 EN
Figure 152:
11.3.4
Signals
Table 195:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
UP
BOOLEAN
DOWN
BOOLEAN
323
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 196:
Name
Description
P01
BOOLEAN
P02
BOOLEAN
P03
BOOLEAN
P04
BOOLEAN
P05
BOOLEAN
P06
BOOLEAN
P07
BOOLEAN
P08
BOOLEAN
P09
BOOLEAN
P10
BOOLEAN
P11
BOOLEAN
P12
BOOLEAN
P13
BOOLEAN
P14
BOOLEAN
P15
BOOLEAN
P16
BOOLEAN
P17
BOOLEAN
P18
BOOLEAN
P19
BOOLEAN
P20
BOOLEAN
P21
BOOLEAN
P22
BOOLEAN
P23
BOOLEAN
P24
BOOLEAN
P25
BOOLEAN
P26
BOOLEAN
P27
BOOLEAN
P28
BOOLEAN
P29
BOOLEAN
P30
BOOLEAN
P31
BOOLEAN
P32
BOOLEAN
SWPOSN
INTEGER
324
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3.5
Table 197:
Name
Settings
SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
NrPos
2 - 32
32
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
11.3.6
Monitored data
Table 198:
Name
SWPOSN
11.3.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Switch position as integer
value
Operation principle
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the
UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates
the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output
settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of
UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application
Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation,
by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and
further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified
325
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the
Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has also an
integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the
block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the
user can see the position names instead of a number.
11.4
11.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
11.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
VSGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a
variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI.
11.4.3
Function block
VSGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC09000341-1-en.vsd
IEC09000341 V1 EN
11.4.4
Signals
Table 199:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
IPOS1
BOOLEAN
IPOS2
BOOLEAN
326
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 200:
Name
11.4.5
Table 201:
Name
Type
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
POSITION
INTEGER
POS1
BOOLEAN
POS2
BOOLEAN
CMDPOS12
BOOLEAN
CMDPOS21
BOOLEAN
Settings
VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
11.4.6
Operation principle
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1
and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in
the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
327
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
IPOS2
PosUndefined
P00
Position1
P01
Position2
P10
PosBadState
P11
11.5
11.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
functions
11.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
DPGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is
used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is
especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.
328
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.3
Function block
DPGGIO
OPEN
CLOSE
VALID
POSITION
IEC09000075_1_en.vsd
IEC09000075 V1 EN
Figure 153:
11.5.4
Signals
Table 202:
Name
Default
Description
OPEN
BOOLEAN
Open indication
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close indication
VALID
BOOLEAN
Valid indication
Table 203:
Name
POSITION
11.5.5
Type
INTEGER
Description
Double point indication
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.6
Operation principle
Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment
or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this
information.
329
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.6
11.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
11.6.2
IEC 60617
identification
SPC8GGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA)
to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive command receiving
functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent
directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of
the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and
SPGGIO function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady.
11.6.3
Function block
SPC8GGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
IEC09000086_1_en.vsd
IEC09000086 V1 EN
Figure 154:
11.6.4
Signals
Table 204:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
330
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 205:
Name
11.6.5
Table 206:
Name
Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output8
Settings
SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Latched1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
331
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.6.6
Operation principle
The PSTO input will determine which the allowed position for the operator (LOCAL,
REMOTE, ALL) is. Upon sending a command from an allowed operator position, one
of the 8 outputs will be activated. The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the
respective output) will determine if the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse
is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will block the operation of the function in case a
command is sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Even if PSTO can be configured to allow LOCAL or ALL operator
positions, the only functional position usable with the SPC8GGIO
function block is REMOTE.
11.7
11.7.1
Identification
Function description
AutomationBits, command function for
DNP3
11.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
AUTOBITS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) is used to configure the DNP3 protocol
command handling.
332
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.7.3
Function block
AUTOBITS
BLOCK
PSTO
^CMDBIT1
^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000030-1-en.vsd
IEC09000030 V1 EN
Figure 155:
11.7.4
Signals
Table 207:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 208:
Name
Description
CMDBIT1
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT2
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT3
BOOLEAN
333
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
11.7.5
Table 209:
Name
Operation
Type
Description
CMDBIT4
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT5
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT6
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT7
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT8
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT9
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT10
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT11
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT12
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT13
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT14
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT15
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT16
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT17
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT18
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT19
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT20
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT21
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT22
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT23
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT24
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT25
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT26
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT27
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT28
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT29
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT30
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT31
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT32
BOOLEAN
Settings
AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Disable/Enable Operation
334
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.7.6
Operation principle
Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulseOn, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon
activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The
BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master.
Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator
place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in
Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to DNP3 communication
protocol manual.
11.8
11.8.1
Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output
signals.
11.8.2
Function block
I103CMD
BLOCK
16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN
Figure 156:
335
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.8.3
Signals
Table 210:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 211:
Table 212:
Name
FunctionType
Description
Block of commands
Name
11.8.4
Default
Type
Description
16-AR
BOOLEAN
17-DIFF
BOOLEAN
18-PROT
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 255
Step
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
11.9
11.9.1
Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.
11.9.2
Function block
BLOCK
I103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN
Figure 157:
336
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.9.3
Signals
Table 213:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 214:
Table 215:
Name
FunctionType
Description
Block of commands
Name
11.9.4
Default
Type
Description
19-LEDRS
BOOLEAN
23-GRP1
BOOLEAN
24-GRP2
BOOLEAN
25-GRP3
BOOLEAN
26-GRP4
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
255
Description
Function type (1-255)
11.10
11.10.1
Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output
signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.
337
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.10.2
Function block
BLOCK
I103USRCMD
^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8
IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN
Figure 158:
11.10.3
Signals
Table 216:
Name
Type
BLOCK
Table 217:
Table 218:
Name
Description
Block of commands
Name
11.10.4
Default
BOOLEAN
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Command output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Command output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Command output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Command output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Command output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Command output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Command output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Command output 8
Settings
I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
PulseMode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Pulse mode
PulseLength
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo_1
1 - 255
Section 11
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo_2
1 - 255
InfNo_3
1 - 255
InfNo_4
1 - 255
InfNo_5
1 - 255
InfNo_6
1 - 255
InfNo_7
1 - 255
InfNo_8
1 - 255
11.11
11.11.1
Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The
function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.
11.11.2
Function block
BLOCK
I103GENCMD
^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN
Figure 159:
11.11.3
Signals
Table 219:
Name
BLOCK
Table 220:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of command
Description
CMD_OFF
BOOLEAN
CMD_ON
BOOLEAN
Command output ON
339
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.11.4
Table 221:
Name
Settings
I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 127
PulseLength
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo
32 - 239
32
11.12
11.12.1
Functionality
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position value
as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI function block)
and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE); as per standard, 0 and 3
values of the position are not supported.
The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to
indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-operate type
of control)
11.12.2
Function block
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN
Figure 160:
11.12.3
Signals
Table 222:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of command
POSITION
INTEGER
SELECT
BOOLEAN
340
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.12.4
Table 223:
Name
Settings
I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
InfNo
160 - 196
160
341
Technical Manual
342
Section 12
Logic
Section 12
Logic
12.1
12.1.1
Identification
Function description
Tripping logic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SMPPTRC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
12.1.2
Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in
the tripping of the fault. It provides pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of
sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with
autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block includes functionality for breaker lock-out.
12.1.3
Function block
SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK
TRIP
TRINP_3P
CLLKOUT
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
ANSI09000284-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000284 V1 EN
Figure 161:
343
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.1.4
Signals
Table 224:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
TRINP_3P
BOOLEAN
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 226:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 225:
12.1.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
CLLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
tTripMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Table 227:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TripLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AutoLock
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
12.1.6
Operation principle
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic SMPPTRC (94) is settable
(tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to secure the breaker opening.
For three-pole tripping, SMPPTRC (94) has a single input (TRINP_3P) through which
all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a
344
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs, as
well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
ANSI05000789 V2 EN
Figure 162:
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-pole trip, if
desired.
Lockout can be activated either by activating the input (SETLKOUT) or automatically
from trip output by setting AutoLock to Enabled. A Lockout condition will be indicated
by activation of the output (CLLKOUT). If lockout has been activated it can only be
reset by activating the input (RSTLKOUT).
If TripLockout is set to Enabled an active Lockout will result in a three phase trip
output. In this way if both AutoLock and TripLockout is set to Enabled the trip will
always be three-phase and sealed in.
12.1.7
Technical data
Table 228:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Trip action
3-ph
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
12.2
12.2.1
Identification
Function description
Trip matrix logic
IEC 61850
identification
TMAGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
345
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.2.2
Functionality
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
TMAGGIO output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the signals
to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.
12.2.3
Function block
TMAGGIO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
IEC09000105 V1 EN
Figure 163:
12.2.4
Signals
Table 229:
Name
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
Section 12
Logic
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
INPUT17
BOOLEAN
Binary input 17
INPUT18
BOOLEAN
Binary input 18
INPUT19
BOOLEAN
Binary input 19
INPUT20
BOOLEAN
Binary input 20
INPUT21
BOOLEAN
Binary input 21
INPUT22
BOOLEAN
Binary input 22
INPUT23
BOOLEAN
Binary input 23
INPUT24
BOOLEAN
Binary input 24
INPUT25
BOOLEAN
Binary input 25
INPUT26
BOOLEAN
Binary input 26
INPUT27
BOOLEAN
Binary input 27
INPUT28
BOOLEAN
Binary input 28
INPUT29
BOOLEAN
Binary input 29
INPUT30
BOOLEAN
Binary input 30
INPUT31
BOOLEAN
Binary input 31
INPUT32
BOOLEAN
Binary input 32
Table 230:
Name
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
347
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.2.5
Table 231:
Name
Settings
TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
PulseTime
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
OnDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ModeOutput1
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
ModeOutput2
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
ModeOutput3
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
12.2.6
Operation principle
Trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output
signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the
necessary grouping of connected input signals (for example, for tripping and alarming
purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1.
2.
3.
when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1
(TRUE) the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 (TRUE) the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1
(TRUE).
when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1
(TRUE) the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
348
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput1
Input 1
OR
AND
On Delay Time 1
Input 16
OR
Output 1
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput2
Input 17
AND
On Delay Time 2
0
OR
Input 32
AND
OR
Output 2
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput3
OR
On Delay Time 3
AND
OR
Output 3
ANSI10000055-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000055 V1 EN
Figure 164:
Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.
12.3
12.3.1
12.3.1.1
Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.
OR function block.
349
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.3.1.2
PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs.
GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.
LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.
SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption.
RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. Reset input has priority.
OR function block
Identification
Function description
OR Function block
IEC 61850
identification
OR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
350
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Function block
OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000288-1-en.vsd
IEC09000288 V1 EN
Figure 165:
OR function block
Signals
Table 232:
OR Input signals
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input signal 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input signal 6
Table 233:
OR Output signals
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
12.3.1.3
IEC 61850
identification
INVERTER
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
351
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Function block
INVERTER
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000287-1-en.vsd
IEC09000287 V1 EN
Figure 166:
Signals
Table 234:
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 235:
Default
0
Description
Input signal
Name
Type
OUT
BOOLEAN
Description
Output signal
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
12.3.1.4
IEC 61850
identification
PULSETIMER
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The pulse function can be used, for example for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.
Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000291-1-en.vsd
IEC09000291 V1 EN
Figure 167:
352
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Signals
Table 236:
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 237:
Default
0
Description
Input signal
Name
Type
OUT
Description
BOOLEAN
Output signal
Settings
Table 238:
Name
t
12.3.1.5
Unit
Step
0.001
Default
0.010
Description
Pulse time length
IEC 61850
identification
GATE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input
to the output or not, depending on setting.
Function block
GATE
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000295-1-en.vsd
IEC09000295 V1 EN
Figure 168:
353
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Signals
Table 239:
Name
Type
INPUT
Default
BOOLEAN
Table 240:
Description
Input signal
Name
Type
OUT
Description
BOOLEAN
Output signal
Settings
Table 241:
Name
Operation
12.3.1.6
Unit
Step
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
IEC 61850
identification
XOR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Function block
XOR
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000292-1-en.vsd
IEC09000292 V1 EN
Figure 169:
354
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Signals
Table 242:
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
Table 243:
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
12.3.1.7
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
LOOPDELAY
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.
Function block
LOOPDELAY
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN
Figure 170:
Signals
Table 244:
Name
INPUT
Default
0
Description
Input signal
355
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Table 245:
Name
Type
OUT
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
12.3.1.8
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
TIMERSET
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to
the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN
Figure 171:
356
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT
ON
OFF
IEC09000290-1-en.vsd
IEC09000290 V1 EN
Figure 172:
Signals
Table 246:
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 247:
Default
0
Description
Input signal
Name
Type
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
OFF
BOOLEAN
Settings
Table 248:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
12.3.1.9
IEC 61850
identification
AND
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs.
357
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to
just use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output
OUT has a default value 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function
has been put in the wrong execution order.
Function block
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000289-1-en.vsd
IEC09000289 V1 EN
Figure 173:
Signals
Table 249:
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
Table 250:
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
12.3.1.10
IEC 61850
identification
SRMEMORY
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
358
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Functionality
The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset
an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a
power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a SetReset flip-flop, SET input has higher priority over RESET input.
Table 251:
SET
OUT
NOUT
Function block
SRMEMORY
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000293-1-en.vsd
IEC09000293 V1 EN
Figure 174:
Signals
Table 252:
Name
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 253:
Name
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
359
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Settings
Table 254:
Name
Memory
12.3.1.11
Unit
Off
On
Step
Default
On
Description
Operating mode of the memory function
IEC 61850
identification
RSMEMORY
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be
reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 255:
RESET
SET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted last
value
Function block
RSMEMORY
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN
Figure 175:
360
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Signals
Table 256:
Name
Type
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 257:
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
Table 258:
Name
Memory
12.3.2
Unit
Disabled
Enabled
Step
Default
Description
Enabled
Technical data
Table 259:
Logic block
100 ms
Range or value
Accuracy
AND
60
60
160
OR
60
60
160
XOR
10
10
20
INVERTER
30
30
80
SRMEMORY
10
10
20
RSMEMORY
10
10
20
GATE
10
10
20
PULSETIMER
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
TIMERSET
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
LOOPDELAY
10
10
20
361
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.4
12.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Fixed signals
12.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
FXDSIGN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals
that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.
12.4.3
Function block
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC09000037.vsd
IEC09000037 V1 EN
Figure 176:
12.4.4
Signals
Table 260:
Name
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
ON
BOOLEAN
INTZERO
INTEGER
INTONE
INTEGER
INTALONE
INTEGER
REALZERO
REAL
362
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Name
12.4.5
Type
Description
STRNULL
STRING
ZEROSMPL
GROUP SIGNAL
GRP_OFF
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
12.4.6
Operation principle
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
12.5
12.5.1
Identification
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion
12.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
B16I
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer.
363
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.5.3
Function block
B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC09000035-1-en.vsd
IEC09000035 V1 EN
Figure 177:
12.5.4
Signals
Table 261:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
364
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Table 262:
Name
Type
OUT
12.5.5
Description
INTEGER
Output value
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
12.5.6
Monitored data
Table 263:
Name
OUT
12.5.7
Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Description
Output value
Operation principle
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input will freeze the output at the
last value.
12.6
12.6.1
Identification
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with
logic node representation
12.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
B16IFCVI
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI)
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
365
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.6.3
Function block
B16IFCVI
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC09000624-1-en.vsd
IEC09000624 V1 EN
Figure 178:
12.6.4
Signals
Table 264:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
366
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Table 265:
Name
Type
OUT
12.6.5
Description
INTEGER
Output value
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
12.6.6
Monitored data
Table 266:
Name
OUT
12.6.7
Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Description
Output value
Operation principle
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI)
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK
input will freeze the output at the last value.
12.7
12.7.1
Identification
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion
12.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
IB16A
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals.
367
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.7.3
Function block
IB16A
BLOCK
INP
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC09000036-1-en.vsd
IEC09000036 V1 EN
Figure 179:
12.7.4
Signals
Table 267:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INP
INTEGER
INP
Table 268:
Name
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
368
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
Name
12.7.5
Type
Description
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
12.7.6
Operation principle
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16A function is designed for receiving the integer
input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
12.8
12.8.1
Identification
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with
logic node representation
12.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
IB16FCVB
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is
used to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.
IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 depending on the
operator position input (PSTO).
369
Technical Manual
Section 12
Logic
12.8.3
Function block
IB16FCVB
BLOCK
PSTO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC09000399-1-en.vsd
IEC09000399 V1 EN
Figure 180:
12.8.4
Signals
Table 269:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 270:
Name
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
Section 12
Logic
Name
12.8.5
Type
Description
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
12.8.6
Operation principle
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is
used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16FCVB
function can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC
61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number
can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local, then no
change is applied to the outputs.
371
Technical Manual
372
Section 13
Monitoring
Section 13
Monitoring
13.1
13.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
13.1.2
IEC 60617
identification
SPGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
13.1.3
Function block
SPGGIO
BLOCK
^IN
IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
IEC09000237 V1 EN
Figure 181:
13.1.4
Signals
Table 271:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
BOOLEAN
Input status
373
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.1.5
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
13.1.6
Operation principle
Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
13.2
13.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
functions 16 inputs
13.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
SP16GGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs (SP16GGIO) function is
used to send up to 16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.
374
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.2.3
Function block
SP16GGIO
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16
IEC09000238_en_1.vsd
IEC09000238 V1 EN
Figure 182:
13.2.4
Signals
Table 272:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1 status
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 status
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 status
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 status
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 status
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 status
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7 status
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8 status
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9 status
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10 status
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11 status
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12 status
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13 status
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14 status
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15 status
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16 status
375
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.2.5
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
13.2.6
MonitoredData
Table 273:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 1 status
OUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 2 status
OUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 3 status
OUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 4 status
OUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 5 status
OUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 6 status
OUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 7 status
OUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 8 status
OUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 9 status
OUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 10 status
OUT11
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 11 status
OUT12
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 12 status
OUT13
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 13 status
OUT14
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 14 status
OUT15
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 15 status
OUT16
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 16 status
OUTOR
GROUP
SIGNAL
376
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.2.7
Operation principle
Upon receiving signals at its inputs, IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
16 inputs (SP16GGIO) function will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signals. To be able to get the signal, one must
use other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which function block
in which equipment or system should receive this information.
There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an
OR type output combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in
PST.
13.3
13.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
13.3.2
MVGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog output to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
13.3.3
Function block
MVGGIO
BLOCK
^IN
^VALUE
RANGE
IEC09000239-2-en.vsd
377
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.3.4
Signals
Table 274:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
REAL
Name
Table 276:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 275:
13.3.5
Default
Type
Description
VALUE
REAL
RANGE
INTEGER
Range
Settings
MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
BasePrefix
micro
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
unit
MV db
1 - 300
Type
10
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
MV hhLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
900.00
MV hLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
800.00
MV lLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-800.00
MV llLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-900.00
MV min
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-1000.00
MV max
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
1000.00
MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
378
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.3.6
Monitored data
Table 277:
Name
13.3.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE
REAL
RANGE
INTEGER
0=Normal
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
Range
Operation principle
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O
functions (MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as
output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other
IEC 61850 clients in the substation.
13.4
Measurements
13.4.1
Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers
(CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction
orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
379
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
impact of noise in the inputs. There are no interconnections regarding any settings or
parameters, neither between functions nor between signals within each function.
Zero clampings are handled by ZeroDb for each signal separately for each of the
functions. For example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by VLZeroDB in
VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by ILZeroDb in CMMXU.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
The output values are displayed in the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function
status/Monitoring/CVMMXN/Outputs
The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical
quantities:
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequential quantities:
Section 13
Monitoring
quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on
the selected settings.
13.4.2
Measurements CVMMXN
13.4.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Measurements
IEC 60617
identification
CVMMXN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
13.4.2.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P*
V3P*
S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
V
V_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
ANSI10000051-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000051 V1 EN
Figure 183:
13.4.2.3
Signals
Table 278:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
381
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Table 279:
Name
13.4.2.4
Table 280:
Name
Type
Description
REAL
S_RANGE
INTEGER
P_INST
REAL
Active power
REAL
P_RANGE
INTEGER
Q_INST
REAL
Reactive power
REAL
Q_RANGE
INTEGER
PF
REAL
PF_RANGE
INTEGER
ILAG
BOOLEAN
ILEAD
BOOLEAN
REAL
V_RANGE
INTEGER
REAL
I_RANGE
INTEGER
REAL
F_RANGE
INTEGER
Settings
CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
A, B, C
PowMagFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
382
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
Values (Range)
0.00 - 1.00
Unit
-
0.01
0.00
Description
Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement
SLowLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
80.0
SLowLowLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
60.0
SMin
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
50.0
SMax
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
PMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
QMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PFMin
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
VMin
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
VMax
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
VRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IMax
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
FrMin
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
FrMax
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
70.000
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
383
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Table 281:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
SHiHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
SHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
PHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
PLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
PLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
QHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
QHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
QLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
QLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PFHiHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
PFHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.800
PFLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-0.800
PFLowLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
VHiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
VHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
VLowLim
Values (Range)
0.0 - 200.0
Unit
%VB
0.1
80.0
Description
Low limit in % of UBase
VLowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
VLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
IHiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
ILowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
ILowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
FrHiHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
65.000
FrHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
63.000
FrLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
47.000
FrLowLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
45.000
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
VMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
385
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.4.2.5
Monitored data
Table 282:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MVA
REAL
MW
REAL
MVAr
PF
REAL
REAL
kV
REAL
REAL
Hz
13.4.3
13.4.3.1
Identification
Function description
Phase current measurement
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CMMXU
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
13.4.3.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
386
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
CMMXU
I3P*
I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL
ANSI08000225-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000225 V1 EN
Figure 184:
13.4.3.3
Signals
Table 283:
Name
I3P
Table 284:
Name
Default
-
Description
Three phase group signal for current inputs
Description
I_A
REAL
IA Amplitude
IA_RANGE
INTEGER
IA_ANGL
REAL
IA Angle
I_B
REAL
IB Amplitude
IB_RANGE
INTEGER
IB_ANGL
REAL
IB Angle
I_C
REAL
IC Amplitude
IC_RANGE
INTEGER
IC_ANGL
REAL
IC Angle
387
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.4.3.4
Table 285:
Name
Settings
CMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
ILDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
ILMax
0 - 500000
1300
Maximum value
ILRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
ILAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 286:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ILZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
ILHiHiLim
0 - 500000
1200
ILHiLim
0 - 500000
1100
ILLowLim
0 - 500000
ILLowLowLim
0 - 500000
ILMin
0 - 500000
Minimum value
ILLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
388
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.4.3.5
Monitored data
Table 287:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
I_A
REAL
IA Amplitude
IA_ANGL
REAL
deg
IA Angle
I_B
REAL
IB Amplitude
IB_ANGL
REAL
deg
IB Angle
I_C
REAL
IC Amplitude
IC_ANGL
REAL
deg
IC Angle
13.4.4
13.4.4.1
Identification
Function description
Phase-phase voltage measurement
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
VMMXU
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
13.4.4.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
VMMXU
V3P*
V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL
ANSI08000223-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000223 V1 EN
Figure 185:
389
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.4.4.3
Signals
Table 288:
Name
Type
V3P
Table 289:
Table 290:
Name
Description
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
Name
13.4.4.4
Default
GROUP
SIGNAL
Type
Description
V_AB
REAL
V_AB Amplitude
VAB_RANG
INTEGER
VAB_ANGL
REAL
VAB Angle
V_BC
REAL
V_BC Amplitude
VBC_RANG
INTEGER
VBC_ANGL
REAL
VBC Angle
V_CA
REAL
V_CA Amplitude
VCA_RANG
INTEGER
VCA_ANGL
REAL
VCA Angle
Settings
VMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
VLDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VLMax
0 - 4000000
170000
Maximum value
VLRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
VLAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
390
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Table 291:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VLZeroDB
0 - 100000
m%
500
VLHiHilLim
0 - 4000000
160000
VLHiLim
0 - 4000000
150000
VLLowLim
0 - 4000000
125000
VLowLowLim
0 - 4000000
115000
VLMin
0 - 4000000
Minimum value
VLLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
13.4.4.5
Monitored data
Table 292:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_AB
REAL
kV
V_AB Amplitude
VAB_ANGL
REAL
deg
VAB Angle
V_BC
REAL
kV
V_BC Amplitude
VBC_ANGL
REAL
deg
VBC Angle
V_CA
REAL
kV
V_CA Amplitude
VCA_ANGL
REAL
deg
VCA Angle
13.4.5
13.4.5.1
Identification
Function description
Current sequence component
measurement
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CMSQI
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
13.4.5.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
391
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
CMSQI
I3P*
3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC08000221-2-en.vsd
IEC08000221 V2 EN
Figure 186:
13.4.5.3
Signals
Table 293:
Name
Type
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 294:
Table 295:
Name
Description
Three phase group signal for current inputs
Name
13.4.5.4
Default
Type
Description
3I0
REAL
3I0 Amplitude
3I0RANG
INTEGER
3I0ANGL
REAL
3I0 Angle
I1
REAL
I1 Amplitude
I1RANG
INTEGER
I1Amplitude range
I1ANGL
REAL
I1 Angle
I2
REAL
I2 Amplitude
I2RANG
INTEGER
I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL
REAL
I2Angle
Settings
CMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
3I0Min
0 - 500000
Minimum value
392
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0Max
0 - 500000
3300
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I1Min
0 - 500000
Minimum value
I1Max
0 - 500000
1300
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I2Min
0 - 500000
Minimum value
I2Max
0 - 500000
1300
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 296:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
3I0HiHiLim
0 - 500000
3600
3I0HiLim
0 - 500000
3300
3I0LowLim
0 - 500000
3I0LowLowLim
0 - 500000
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
I1HiHiLim
0 - 500000
1200
I1HiLim
0 - 500000
1100
I1LowLim
0 - 500000
I1LowLowLim
0 - 500000
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
I2HiHiLim
0 - 500000
1200
I2HiLim
0 - 500000
1100
I2LowLim
0 - 500000
I2LowLowLim
0 - 500000
13.4.5.5
Monitored data
Table 297:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0
REAL
3I0 Amplitude
3I0ANGL
REAL
deg
3I0 Angle
I1
REAL
I1 Amplitude
I1ANGL
REAL
deg
I1 Angle
I2
REAL
I2 Amplitude
I2ANGL
REAL
deg
I2Angle
13.4.6
13.4.6.1
Identification
Function description
Voltage sequence measurement
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
VMSQI
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
13.4.6.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
394
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
VMSQI
V3P*
3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL
ANSI08000224-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000224 V1 EN
Figure 187:
13.4.6.3
Signals
Table 298:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 299:
Table 300:
Name
Description
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
Name
13.4.6.4
Default
Type
Description
3V0
REAL
3U0 Amplitude
3V0RANG
INTEGER
3V0ANGL
REAL
3U0 Angle
V1
REAL
U1 Amplitude
V1RANG
INTEGER
V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL
REAL
U1 Angle
V2
REAL
U2 Amplitude
V2RANG
INTEGER
V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL
REAL
U2 Angle
Settings
VMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
3V0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
3V0Min
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
395
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3V0Max
0 - 2000000
318000
Maximum value
3V0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
3V0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
3V0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V1Min
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
V1Max
0 - 2000000
106000
Maximum value
V1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
V1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V2Min
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
V2Max
0 - 2000000
106000
Maximum value
V2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
V2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
V2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 301:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3V0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
3V0HiHiLim
0 - 2000000
288000
3V0HiLim
0 - 2000000
258000
3V0LowLim
0 - 2000000
213000
3V0LowLowLim
0 - 2000000
198000
V1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
V1HiHiLim
0 - 2000000
96000
V1HiLim
0 - 2000000
86000
V1LowLim
0 - 2000000
71000
V1LowLowLim
0 - 2000000
66000
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
V1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
V2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
V2HiHiLim
0 - 2000000
96000
V2HiLim
0 - 2000000
86000
V2LowLim
0 - 2000000
71000
V2LowLowLim
0 - 2000000
66000
13.4.6.5
Monitored data
Table 302:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3V0
REAL
kV
3U0 Amplitude
3V0ANGL
REAL
deg
3U0 Angle
V1
REAL
kV
U1 Amplitude
V1ANGL
REAL
deg
U1 Angle
V2
REAL
kV
U2 Amplitude
V2ANGL
REAL
deg
U2 Angle
13.4.7
13.4.7.1
Identification
Function description
Phase-neutral voltage measurement
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
VNMMXU
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
13.4.7.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
397
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
VNMMXU
V3P*
V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL
ANSI08000226-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000226 V1 EN
Figure 188:
13.4.7.3
Signals
Table 303:
Name
V3P
Table 304:
Name
Default
-
Description
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
Description
V_A
REAL
VA_RANGE
INTEGER
VA_ANGL
REAL
V_B
REAL
VB_RANGE
INTEGER
VB_ANGL
REAL
V_C
REAL
VC_RANGE
INTEGER
VC_ANGL
REAL
398
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.4.7.4
Table 305:
Name
Settings
VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
VDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VMax
0 - 2000000
106000
Maximum value
VRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
VLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 306:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
VHiHiLim
0 - 2000000
96000
VHiLim
0 - 2000000
86000
VLowLim
0 - 2000000
71000
VLowLowLim
0 - 2000000
66000
VMin
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
13.4.7.5
Monitored data
Table 307:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_A
REAL
kV
VA_ANGL
REAL
deg
V_B
REAL
kV
399
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VB_ANGL
REAL
deg
V_C
REAL
kV
VC_ANGL
REAL
deg
VC Angle, magnitude of
reported value
13.4.8
Operation principle
13.4.8.1
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED
and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference. The PhaseAngleRef is set in
local HMI under: Configuration/Analog modules/Reference channel service values.
Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB,
VBC, VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision
zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXN.
Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block
by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 189. The monitoring has two
different modes of operating:
400
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or Highhigh limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN
Figure 189:
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: Highhigh limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may
be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get
measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 189.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of
the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following
basic reporting modes are available:
401
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Cyclic reporting
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
en05000500.vsd
IEC05000500 V1 EN
Figure 190:
Periodic reporting
If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is
larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new
measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 191
shows an example with the magnitude dead-band supervision. The picture is
402
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
t
99000529.vsd
IEC99000529 V1 EN
Figure 191:
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the Y set limits. Even if amplitude dead-band reporting is selected, there
will be a 30 s "back-ground" cyclic reporting as well.
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XZeroDb), figure 192, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 192 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
403
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods. Even if integral dead-band
reporting is selected, there will be a 30 s "back-ground" cyclic reporting as well.
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y1
Y4
Value
Reported
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
99000530.vsd
IEC99000530 V1 EN
Figure 192:
13.4.8.2
Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation
404
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
A, B, C
S = VA I A* + VB I B* + VC I C*
EQUATION1561 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VA + VB + VC
+ IB + IC
)/
)/3
Comment
EQUATION1562 V1 EN
Arone
S = VAB I A - VBC I C
*
(Equation 80)
EQUATION1563 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VAB + VBC / 2
A
EQUATION1564 V1 EN
PosSeq
V =
(Equation 82)
I = I PosSeq
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq
EQUATION1565 V1 EN
AB
S = VAB I A - I B
*
(Equation 84)
EQUATION1567 V1 EN
BC
S = VBC I B - I C
*
(Equation 86)
EQUATION1569 V1 EN
I = IA + IB / 2
CA
S = VCA I C - I A
*
(Equation 88)
EQUATION1571 V1 EN
I = I B + IC / 2
I = IC + I A / 2
V =
S = 3 VA I A
*
EQUATION1573 V1 EN
(Equation 90)
(Equation 89)
3 VA
I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN
(Equation 87)
V = VCA
EQUATION1572 V1 EN
(Equation 85)
V = VBC
EQUATION1570 V1 EN
(Equation 83)
V = VAB
EQUATION1568 V1 EN
(Equation 81)
3 VPosSeq
EQUATION1566 V1 EN
+ IC / 2
(Equation 91)
405
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
V =
S = 3 VB I B
*
(Equation 92)
EQUATION1575 V1 EN
3 VB
I = IB
EQUATION1576 V1 EN
V =
S = 3 VC I C
*
EQUATION1577 V1 EN
(Equation 94)
(Equation 93)
3 VC
I = IC
EQUATION1578 V1 EN
Comment
(Equation 95)
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes
that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power
system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P,
Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 96)
EQUATION1403 V1 EN
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 97)
EQUATION1404 V1 EN
S = S =
P +Q
2
EQUATION1405 V1 EN
(Equation 98)
PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN
(Equation 99)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind
voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is
leading the voltage phasor.
406
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to
get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below
5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 193.
% of In
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 193:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I
and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
407
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
EQUATION1407 V1 EN
where:
X
is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld
is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, the magnitude level for current and voltage measurement is forced to zero.
When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the
measured values for power (P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well.
Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the CVMMXN function,
is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision
(observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see
section "Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude
(setting parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for
example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration
it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
408
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Directionality
CTStartPoint defines if the CTs grounding point is located towards or from the
protected object under observation. If everything is properly set power is always
measured towards protection object.
Busbar
52
IED
Q
Protected
Object
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000373 V2 EN
Figure 194:
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they
flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the
power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have
actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements.
This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0
degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
13.4.8.3
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5,
30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see figure 193.
Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
13.4.8.4
13.4.8.5
13.4.9
Technical data
Table 308:
Function
Range or value
Voltage
(0.1-1.5) Vn
0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Connected current
(0.2-4.0) In
0.5% of In at I In
0.5% of I at I > In
Active power, P
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Accuracy
1)
410
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reactive power, Q
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Apparent power, S
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
cos phi = 1
0.5% of S at S > Sn
0.5% of Sn at S Sn
< 0.02 2)
1)
2)
1)
13.5
13.5.1
Identification
Function description
Event counter
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CNTGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00946 V1 EN
13.5.2
Functionality
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counters which are used for storing the number of
times each counter input has been activated.
13.5.3
Function block
CNTGGIO
BLOCK
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
RESET
VALUE1
VALUE2
VALUE3
VALUE4
VALUE5
VALUE6
IEC09000090_1_en.vsd
IEC09000090 V1 EN
Figure 195:
411
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.5.4
Signals
Table 309:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
COUNTER1
BOOLEAN
COUNTER2
BOOLEAN
COUNTER3
BOOLEAN
COUNTER4
BOOLEAN
COUNTER5
BOOLEAN
COUNTER6
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
Name
Table 311:
Name
Operation
13.5.6
Description
BLOCK
Table 310:
13.5.5
Default
Type
Description
VALUE1
INTEGER
Output of counter 1
VALUE2
INTEGER
Output of counter 2
VALUE3
INTEGER
Output of counter 3
VALUE4
INTEGER
Output of counter 4
VALUE5
INTEGER
Output of counter 5
VALUE6
INTEGER
Output of counter 6
Settings
CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Disabled
Description
Disable/Enable Operation
Monitored data
Table 312:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE1
INTEGER
Output of counter 1
VALUE2
INTEGER
Output of counter 2
VALUE3
INTEGER
Output of counter 3
412
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
13.5.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE4
INTEGER
Output of counter 4
VALUE5
INTEGER
Output of counter 5
VALUE6
INTEGER
Output of counter 6
Operation principle
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many times
each of the inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six inputs is
updated, giving the total number of times the input has been activated, as soon as an
input is activated. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulses per second. The
maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 the counter will stop at 10
000 and no restart will take place.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This
however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new
value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before
auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory
will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters at
testing.The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six
counters are set to 0.
All inputs are configured via PCM600.
13.5.7.1
Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850
client. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI
graphical display.
13.5.8
Technical data
Table 313:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Counter value
0-10000
10 pulses/s
413
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6
Disturbance report
13.6.1
Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a,
maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
Sequential of events
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
13.6.2
13.6.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Disturbance report
DRPRDRE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
414
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.2.2
Function block
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC09000346-1-en.vsd
IEC09000346 V1 EN
Figure 196:
13.6.2.3
Signals
Table 314:
Name
13.6.2.4
Table 315:
Name
Type
Description
DRPOFF
BOOLEAN
RECSTART
BOOLEAN
RECMADE
BOOLEAN
CLEARED
BOOLEAN
MEMUSED
BOOLEAN
Settings
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 3.00
0.01
0.10
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
TimeLimit
0.5 - 8.0
0.1
1.0
PostRetrig
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
MaxNoStoreRec
10 - 100
100
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
OpModeTest
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
415
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.2.5
Monitored data
Table 316:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
MemoryUsed
INTEGER
UnTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN
416
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
UnTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN
417
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
UnTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN
418
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
13.6.2.6
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
UnTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN
FaultNumber
INTEGER
Measured values
Table 317:
Name
Default
Description
ManTrig
BOOLEAN
ClearDist
BOOLEAN
ClearProcessEv
BOOLEAN
419
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.3
13.6.3.1
Identification
Function description
13.6.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
A1RADR
A2RADR
A3RADR
Function block
A1RADR
^GRPINPUT1
^GRPINPUT2
^GRPINPUT3
^GRPINPUT4
^GRPINPUT5
^GRPINPUT6
^GRPINPUT7
^GRPINPUT8
^GRPINPUT9
^GRPINPUT10
IEC09000348-1-en.vsd
IEC09000348 V1 EN
Figure 197:
13.6.3.3
Signals
A1RADR - A3RADR Input signals
Tables for input signals for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for
GRPINPUT number.
420
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Table 318:
Name
13.6.3.4
Type
Default
Description
GRPINPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Settings
A1RADR - A3RADR Settings
Setting tables for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel
numbers.
Table 319:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
421
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
FunType1
0 - 255
InfNo1
0 - 255
FunType2
0 - 255
InfNo2
0 - 255
FunType3
0 - 255
InfNo3
0 - 255
FunType4
0 - 255
InfNo4
0 - 255
FunType5
0 - 255
InfNo5
0 - 255
FunType6
0 - 255
InfNo6
0 - 255
FunType7
0 - 255
InfNo7
0 - 255
FunType8
0 - 255
InfNo8
0 - 255
422
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunType9
0 - 255
InfNo9
0 - 255
FunType10
0 - 255
InfNo10
0 - 255
Table 320:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
424
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200
13.6.4
13.6.4.1
Identification
Function description
Analog input signals
13.6.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
A4RADR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40
IEC09000350-1-en.vsd
IEC09000350 V1 EN
Figure 198:
Channels 31-40 are not shown in LHMI. They are used for internally
calculated analog signals.
425
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.4.3
Signals
Table 321:
Name
13.6.4.4
Table 322:
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT31
REAL
Analog channel 31
INPUT32
REAL
Analog channel 32
INPUT33
REAL
Analog channel 33
INPUT34
REAL
Analog channel 34
INPUT35
REAL
Analog channel 35
INPUT36
REAL
Analog channel 36
INPUT37
REAL
Analog channel 37
INPUT38
REAL
Analog channel 38
INPUT39
REAL
Analog channel 39
INPUT40
REAL
Analog channel 40
Settings
A4RADR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation31
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation32
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation33
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation34
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation35
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation36
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation37
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation38
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation39
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation40
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
FunType31
0 - 255
426
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo31
0 - 255
FunType32
0 - 255
InfNo32
0 - 255
FunType33
0 - 255
InfNo33
0 - 255
FunType34
0 - 255
InfNo34
0 - 255
FunType35
0 - 255
InfNo35
0 - 255
FunType36
0 - 255
InfNo36
0 - 255
FunType37
0 - 255
InfNo37
0 - 255
FunType38
0 - 255
InfNo38
0 - 255
FunType39
0 - 255
InfNo39
0 - 255
FunType40
0 - 255
InfNo40
0 - 255
427
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Table 323:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NomValue31
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp31
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe31
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp31
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe31
0 - 5000
200
NomValue32
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp32
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe32
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp32
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe32
0 - 5000
200
NomValue33
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp33
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe33
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp33
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe33
0 - 5000
200
NomValue34
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp34
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe34
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp34
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe34
0 - 5000
200
NomValue35
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp35
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe35
0 - 200
50
428
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigOp35
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe35
0 - 5000
200
NomValue36
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp36
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe36
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp36
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe36
0 - 5000
200
NomValue37
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp37
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe37
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp37
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe37
0 - 5000
200
NomValue38
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp38
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe38
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp38
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe38
0 - 5000
200
NomValue39
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp39
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe39
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp39
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe39
0 - 5000
200
NomValue40
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp40
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
429
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UnderTrigLe40
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp40
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe40
0 - 5000
200
13.6.5
13.6.5.1
Identification
Function description
13.6.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
B1RBDR
B2RBDR
B3RBDR
B4RBDR
B5RBDR
B6RBDR
Function block
B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC09000352-1-en.vsd
IEC09000352 V1 EN
Figure 199:
430
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.5.3
Signals
B1RBDR - B6RBDR Input signals
Tables for input signals for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for INPUT and
description number.
Table 324:
Name
13.6.5.4
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 16
Settings
B1RBDR - B6RBDR Settings
Setting tables for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for binary channel and
description numbers.
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Table 325:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED01
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED02
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED03
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED04
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED05
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED06
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED07
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
432
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED08
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED09
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED10
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR11
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED11
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR12
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED12
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR13
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED13
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR14
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED14
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR15
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED15
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
433
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR16
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED16
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
FunType1
0 - 255
InfNo1
0 - 255
FunType2
0 - 255
InfNo2
0 - 255
FunType3
0 - 255
InfNo3
0 - 255
FunType4
0 - 255
InfNo4
0 - 255
FunType5
0 - 255
InfNo5
0 - 255
FunType6
0 - 255
InfNo6
0 - 255
FunType7
0 - 255
InfNo7
0 - 255
FunType8
0 - 255
InfNo8
0 - 255
FunType9
0 - 255
InfNo9
0 - 255
FunType10
0 - 255
InfNo10
0 - 255
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunType11
0 - 255
InfNo11
0 - 255
FunType12
0 - 255
InfNo12
0 - 255
FunType13
0 - 255
InfNo13
0 - 255
FunType14
0 - 255
InfNo14
0 - 255
FunType15
0 - 255
InfNo15
0 - 255
FunType16
0 - 255
InfNo16
0 - 255
Table 326:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Hide
435
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
436
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Hide
13.6.6
Operation principle
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
Sequential of events
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
Figure 200 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events , Event recorder and Indications uses information
from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog
information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR). Disturbance recorder
DRPRDRE acquires information from both AxRADR and BxRBDR.
437
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
A1-4RADR
A4RADR
Disturbance Report
DRPRDRE
Analog signals
Trip value rec
B1-6RBDR
Binary signals
Disturbance
recorder
B6RBDR
Sequential of
events
Event recorder
Indications
ANSI09000337-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000337 V1 EN
Figure 200:
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each
with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded
when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. In a 60 Hz
system it is possible to record 80 where the maximum recording time is 3.4 seconds.
The memory limit does not affect the rest of the disturbance report (Sequential of
events, Event recorder, Indications and Trip value recorder).
The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total
recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.
438
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
13.6.6.1
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or
MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely
via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
13.6.6.2
Indications
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see Indication section for detailed information.
13.6.6.3
Event recorder
The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see Event recorder section for detailed information.
13.6.6.4
Sequential of events
The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see Sequential of events section for detailed information.
13.6.6.5
13.6.6.6
Disturbance recorder
Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the
fault, see Disturbance recorder section for detailed information.
439
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.6.7
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report
13.6.6.8
Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder, event recorder and indication function register disturbance data
and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on
which criterion stops the current disturbance recording
tRecording =
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT
PostFaultRecT
3
en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN
Figure 201:
PreFaultRecT, 1
Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2
Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit
time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit
Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the
setting TimeLimit to set this time.
440
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.6.9
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (phase
differential currents, bias currents and so on).
A1RADR
SMAI
External analog
signals
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI3P
AI1
A2RADR
GRPINPUT1
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI2
AI3
GRPINPUT2
AI4NAME
AI4
AIN
GRPINPUT4
A3RADR
GRPINPUT3
GRPINPUT5
GRPINPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
en05000653-2.vsd
IEC05000653 V2 EN
Figure 202:
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to
the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the
base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.
Application configuration tool (ACT) is used for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report.
441
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used).SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in
graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
13.6.6.10
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is
selected to be recorded when:
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
= Operation>TrigDR =Disabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the
yellow (PICKUP) and red (TRIP) LED on the local HMI (SetLED = Disabled/Pickup/
Trip/Pickup and Trip).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used
as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
13.6.6.11
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of
events, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is
442
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the
importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in
the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found,
the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value
is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is
indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure
is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this initiation is typically in
the range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
13.6.6.12
Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a
recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the postfault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
443
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.6.7
Technical data
Table 327:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Current recording
1,0% of Ir at I Ir
1,0% of I at I > Ir
Voltage recording
1,0% of Vn at V Vn
1,0% of Vat V> Vn
Pre-fault time
(0.053.00) s
Post-fault time
(0.110.0) s
Limit time
(0.58.0) s
1 ms
30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)
96
30
96
150
Sampling rate
1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth
(5-300) Hz
444
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.7
Indications
13.7.1
Functionality
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that
have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short
perspective to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display
status information about the IED and the Disturbance report function (trigged).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance report function that have changed status during a disturbance.
13.7.2
Function block
The Indications function has no function block of its own.
13.7.3
Signals
13.7.3.1
Input signals
The Indications function may log the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.
13.7.4
Operation principle
The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light
In Service
Flashing light
Internal fail
Dark
No power supply
Yellow LED:
Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.
Red LED:
445
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring
the binary inputs.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the userdefined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
disturbance recorder function , indications and event recorder function .
13.7.5
Technical data
Table 328:
Function
Buffer capacity
13.8
Event recorder
13.8.1
Functionality
Value
Maximum number of indications presented
for single disturbance
96
100
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).
446
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
13.8.2
Function block
The Event recorder has no function block of its own.
13.8.3
Signals
13.8.3.1
Input signals
The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.
13.8.4
Operation principle
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be
generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = Enabled and a new trig signal
appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function , indications and event recorder function.
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed
via the local HMI or PCM600.
Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing
the IED simultaneously.
447
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.8.5
Technical data
Table 329:
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in disturbance report
150
100
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on time
synchronizing
13.9
Sequential of events
13.9.1
Functionality
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The sequential of events logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
report function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a FIFObuffer.
13.9.2
Function block
The Sequential of events has no function block of its own.
13.9.3
Signals
13.9.3.1
Input signals
The Sequential of events logs the same binary input signals as configured for the
Disturbance report function.
13.9.4
Operation principle
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the
sequential of events function stores input name, status and time in the sequential of
events in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal
logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.
448
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
local HMI.
The sequential of events function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder
function, which is only active during a disturbance.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function, indications and the event recorder function.
The sequential of events is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report
information.
13.9.5
Technical data
Table 330:
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in the list
1000
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on time
synchronizing
13.10
13.10.1
Functionality
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle
before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
13.10.2
Function block
The Trip value recorder has no function block of its own.
449
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.10.3
Signals
13.10.3.1
Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to
A3RADR (not A4RADR).
13.10.4
Operation principle
Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault magnitudes as well
as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter
ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.
When a fault interception point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values
of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault
and fault values.
The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is
the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in
the Disturbance recorder function .
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and
managed in via the local HMI or PCM600.
13.10.5
Technical data
Table 331:
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of analog inputs
30
100
450
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.11
Disturbance recorder
13.11.1
Functionality
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded
information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (for example
corrective actions) and long perspective (for example functional analysis).
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary
signals connected to the Disturbance report function (maximum 40 analog and 96
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder
function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions.
Up to three seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED
and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.
13.11.2
Function block
The Disturbance recorder has no function block of its own.
13.11.3
Signals
See Disturbance report for input and output signals.
13.11.4
Settings
See Disturbance report for settings.
13.11.5
Operation principle
Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The
binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM) through the Signal Matrix Analog
Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally
derived analog signals.
451
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic
buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will
continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this
buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the
data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as
the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault
time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog
inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
13.11.5.1
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:
Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
452
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance, that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions . The
Disturbance handling tool use this information and present the recording in a userfriendly way.
General:
Analog:
Binary:
Signal names
Status of binary input signals
453
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.11.6
Technical data
Table 332:
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of analog inputs
40
96
100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number
of channels, typical value)
13.12
13.12.1
Identification
Function description
Measured value expander block
13.12.2
IEC 61850
identification
MVEXP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high
limit. The measure value expander block has been introduced to enable translating the
integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low
limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high limit. The output
signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
454
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.12.3
Function block
MVEXP
RANGE*
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC09000215-1-en.vsd
IEC09000215 V1 EN
Figure 203:
13.12.4
Signals
Table 333:
Name
RANGE
Table 334:
Name
13.12.5
Default
0
Description
Measured value range
Description
HIGHHIGH
BOOLEAN
HIGH
BOOLEAN
NORMAL
BOOLEAN
LOW
BOOLEAN
LOWLOW
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (VBase) and
primary power (SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function
GBASVAL. Setting GlobalBaseSel is used to select a GBASVAL function for
reference of base values.
13.12.6
Operation principle
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The
455
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according
to table 335.
Table 335:
Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
LOWLOW
between low
and high limit
High
LOW
High
NORMAL
High
HIGH
High
HIGHHIGH
High
13.13
13.13.1
Identification
Function description
Station battery supervision function
13.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
SPVNZBAT
IEC 60617
identification
U<>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
GUID-2D3C21EA-75E9-4E44-AA0F-4DEA7599182A V1 EN
Figure 204:
13.13.3
Function block
Functionality
The station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT is used for monitoring battery
terminal voltage.
SPVNZBAT activates the start and alarm outputs when the battery terminal voltage
exceeds the set upper limit or drops below the set lower limit. A time delay for the
overvoltage and undervoltage alarms can be set according to definite time characteristics.
456
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
In the definite time (DT) mode, SPVNZBAT operates after a predefined operate time
and resets when the battery undervoltage or overvoltage condition disappears.
13.13.4
Signals
Table 336:
Name
Type
0.00
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 338:
Name
Description
REAL
Table 337:
13.13.5
Default
V_BATT
Type
Description
AL_VLOW
BOOLEAN
Alarm when voltage has been below low limit for a set
time
AL_VHI
BOOLEAN
PU_VLOW
BOOLEAN
PU_VHI
BOOLEAN
Settings
SPVNZBAT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
RtdBattVolt
20.00 - 250.00
1.00
110.00
BattVoltLowLim
60 - 140
%Vbat
70
BattVoltHiLim
60 - 140
%Vbat
120
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
13.13.6
Measured values
Table 339:
Name
Default
Description
U_BATT
REAL
0.00
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
457
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.13.7
Monitored Data
Table 340:
Name
BATTVOLT
13.13.8
Values (Range)
-
Unit
kV
Description
Service value of the battery
terminal voltage
Operation principle
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable.
The function execution requires that at least one of the function outputs
is connected in configuration.
The operation of the station battery supervision function can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-9ACD1EE5-61C1-4CB8-9AF0-6F43292FC547 V2 EN
Figure 205:
The battery rated voltage is set with the RtdBattVolt setting. The value of the
BattVoltLowLim and BattVoltHiLim settings are given in relative per unit to the
RtdBattVolt setting.
It is possible to block the function outputs by the BLOCK input.
Section 13
Monitoring
Time delay
When the operate timer has reached the value set by the tDelay setting, the AL_ULOW
and AL_UHI outputs are activated. If the voltage returns to the normal value before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
tReset, the operate timer resets and the ST_ULOW and ST_UHI outputs are deactivated.
13.13.9
Technical data
Table 341:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(60-140) % of Vbat
<105 %
(60-140) % of Vbat
>95 %
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 110 ms
13.14
13.14.1
Identification
Function description
Insulation gas monitoring function
13.14.2
IEC 61850
identification
SSIMG
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
63
Functionality
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker
is used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based
on received information.
459
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.14.3
Function block
SSIMG (63)
BLOCK
PRESSURE
BLK_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRESSURE
PRES_LO
TEMP
TEMP
PRES_ALM
TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000129-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000129 V1 EN
Figure 206:
13.14.4
Signals
Inputs PRESSURE and TEMP together with settings PressAlmLimit,
PressLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in
this release of 650 series.
Table 342:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRESSURE
REAL
0.0
TEMP
REAL
0.0
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_P_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Table 343:
Name
Description
PRESSURE
REAL
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
TEMP
REAL
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
460
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.14.5
Table 344:
Name
Settings
SSIMG (63) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
PressAlmLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
5.00
PressLOLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
3.00
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
tPressureAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPressureLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetPressAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetPressLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
13.14.6
Operation principle
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used to monitor gas pressure in the
circuit breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate
alarm signals, pressure below alarm level and pressure below lockout level. If the input
signal PRES_ALM is high, which indicate that the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is
below alarm level, the function initiates output signal PRES_ALM, pressure below
alarm level, after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is
required. Similarly, if the input signal PRES_LO is high, which indicate gas pressure
in the circuit breaker is below lockout level, the function initiates output signal
PRES_LO, after a time delay. The two time delay settings, tPressureAlarm and
tPressureLO, are included in order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in
the gas pressure. If the gas pressure in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for
more than the set time delays the corresponding signals, PRES_ALM, pressure below
alarm level and PRES_LO, pressure below lockout level alarm will be obtained.
The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms and the input signal
BLOCK to block both alarms and the function.
461
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.14.7
Technical data
Table 345:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Pressure alarm
0.00-25.00
Pressure lockout
0.00-25.00
Temperature alarm
-40.00-200.00
Temperature lockout
-40.00-200.00
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 110 ms
13.15
13.15.1
Identification
Function description
Insulation liquid monitoring function
13.15.2
IEC 61850
identification
SSIML
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
71
Functionality
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based
on received information.
13.15.3
Function block
SSIML (71)
BLOCK
LEVEL
BLK_ALM
LVL_ALM
LEVEL
LVL_LO
TEMP
TEMP
LVL_ALM
TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000128-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000128 V1 EN
Figure 207:
462
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.15.4
Signals
Inputs LEVEL and TEMP together with settings LevelAlmLimit,
LevelLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in
this release of 650 series.
Table 346:
Name
Type
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
LEVEL
REAL
0.0
TEMP
REAL
0.0
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
LEVEL_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_L_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 348:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 347:
13.15.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
LEVEL
REAL
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
LVL_LO
BOOLEAN
TEMP
REAL
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
Settings
SSIML (71) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
LevelAlmLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
5.00
LevelLOLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
3.00
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
463
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
tLevelAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tLevelLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetLevelAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetLevelLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
13.15.6
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Operation principle
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used to monitor oil level in the
circuit breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate
alarm signals, level below alarm level and level below lockout level. If the input signal
LVL_ALM is high, which indicate that the oil level in the circuit breaker is below
alarm level, the output signal LVL_ALM, level below alarm level, will be initiated
after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is required.
Similarly, if the input signal LVL_LO is high, which indicate oil level in the circuit
breaker is below lockout level, the output signal LVL_LO, will be initiated after a time
delay. The two time delay settings, tLevelAlarm and tLevelLockOut, are included in
order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in the oil level. If the oil level
in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for more than the set time delays the
corresponding signals, LVL_ALM, level below alarm level and LVL_LO, level below
lockout level alarm will be obtained.
The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms and the input signal
BLOCK to block both alarms and the function.
13.15.7
Technical data
Table 349:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
0.00-25.00
0.00-25.00
Temperature alarm
-40.00-200.00
Temperature lockout
-40.00-200.00
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 110 ms
464
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.16
13.16.1
Identification
Function description
Circuit breaker condition monitoring
13.16.2
IEC 61850
identification
SSCBR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different
parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number
of operations has reached a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit
breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge
indication, breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and accumulated
energy. The energy is calculated from the measured input currents as a sum of I^2 t
values. Alarms are generated when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings.
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function
outputs, if desired.
13.16.3
Function block
SSCBR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
ALMPRES
LOPRES
SPRCHRGN
SPRCHRGD
CBCNTRST
IACCRST
SPCHTRST
TRVTRST
TRVTOAL
TRVTCAL
SPRCHRAL
OPRALM
OPRLOALM
IACCALM
IACCLOAL
CBLIFEAL
NOOPRALM
PRESALM
PRESLO
CBOPEN
CBINVPOS
52a
ANSI10000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000281 V1 EN
Figure 208:
465
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.16.4
Signals
Table 350:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
ALMPRES
BOOLEAN
LOPRES
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRGN
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRGD
BOOLEAN
CBCNTRST
BOOLEAN
IACCRST
BOOLEAN
SPCHTRST
BOOLEAN
TRVTRST
BOOLEAN
Table 351:
Name
Description
TRVTOAL
BOOLEAN
TRVTCAL
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRAL
BOOLEAN
OPRALM
BOOLEAN
OPRLOALM
BOOLEAN
IACCALM
BOOLEAN
IACCLOAL
BOOLEAN
CBLIFEAL
BOOLEAN
NOOPRALM
BOOLEAN
PRESALM
BOOLEAN
PRESLO
BOOLEAN
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
CB is in open position
CBINVPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in intermediate position
52a
BOOLEAN
CB is in closed position
466
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.16.5
Table 352:
Name
Settings
SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
AccDisLevel
5.00 - 500.00
0.01
10.00
CurrExp
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
2.00
RatedFaultCurr
500.00 - 75000.00
0.01
5000.00
RatedOpCurr
100.00 - 5000.00
0.01
1000.00
AccCurrAlmLvl
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
AccCurrLO
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
DirCoef
-3.00 - -0.50
0.01
-1.50
LifeAlmLevel
0 - 99999
5000
OpNumRatCurr
1 - 99999
10000
OpNumFaultCurr
1 - 10000
1000
OpNumAlm
0 - 9999
200
OpNumLO
0 - 9999
300
tOpenAlm
0 - 200
ms
40
tCloseAlm
0 - 200
ms
40
OpenTimeCorr
0 - 100
ms
10
CloseTimeCorr
0 - 100
ms
10
DifTimeCorr
-10 - 10
ms
tSprngChrgAlm
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
1.00
tPressAlm
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
TPressLO
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
AccEnerInitVal
0.00 - 9999.99
0.01
0.00
CountInitVal
0 - 9999
CBRemLife
0 - 9999
5000
InactDayAlm
0 - 9999
Day
2000
InactDayInit
0 - 9999
Day
InactHourAlm
0 - 23
Hour
467
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.16.6
Monitored data
Table 353:
Name
13.16.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CBOTRVT
REAL
ms
CBCLTRVT
REAL
ms
SPRCHRT
REAL
NO_OPR
INTEGER
NOOPRDAY
INTEGER
CBLIFE_A
INTEGER
CBLIFE_B
INTEGER
CBLIFE_C
INTEGER
IACC_A
REAL
IACC_B
REAL
IACC_C
REAL
Operation principle
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and
monitoring subfunctions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the
Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable. The
operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to Disabled.
The operation of the functions can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
468
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
CBOPEN
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
I_A
I3P
Circuit
breaker
status
52a
CBINVPOS
I_B
I_B
Operation
monitoring
NOOPRALM
BLK_ALM
BLOCK
Breaker
contact
travel time
TRVTRST
Operation
counter
Accumulated energy
IACCRST
TRVTOAL
TRVTCAL
OPRALM
OPRLOALM
IACCALM
IACCLOAL
Breaker
life time
CBLIFEAL
Spring
charge
indication
SPRCHRAL
CBCNTRST
SPRCHRGN
SPRCHRGD
TRVTRST
Gas
pressure
supervision
ALMPRES
LOPRES
PRESALM
PRELO
GUID-FE21BBDC-57A6-425C-B22B-8E646C1BD932-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 209:
13.16.7.1
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
POSCLOSE
Contact
position
indicator
POSOPEN
I_A
I3P
I_B
I_C
Phase
current
check
CBOPEN
CBINVPOS
52a
GUID-60ADC120-4B5A-40D8-B1C5-475E4634214B-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 210:
13.16.7.2
470
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
GUID-82C88B52-1812-477F-8B1A-3011A300547A V1 EN
Figure 211:
Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for
circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive,
that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by
monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The inactive days NOOPRDAY is available through the Monitored data view. It is also
possible to set the initial inactive days by using the InactDayInit parameter.
13.16.7.3
GUID-4D82C157-53AF-40C9-861C-CF131B49072B V1 EN
Figure 212:
471
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
GUID-3AD25F5A-639A-4941-AA61-E69FA2357AFE V1 EN
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between
the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, in order to incorporate the time t1+t2, a correction factor
needs to be added with 10 to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the
OpenTimeCorr (=t1+t2). The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the
CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time tTravelOpen and the closing travel time
tTravelClose are available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or
through tools via communications.
472
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.16.7.4
Operation counter
The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles.
Both open and close operations are included in one operation cycle. The operation
counter value is updated after each open operation.
The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-FF1221A4-6160-4F92-9E7F-A412875B69E1 V1 EN
Figure 213:
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of the
binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NO_OPR is available through the Monitored data view on
the LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the CountInitVal parameter
and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the clear menu from LHMI.
13.16.7.5
Accumulation of Iyt
Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.
The operation of the module can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
473
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
I_A
I3P
I_B
I_C
Accumulated energy
calculator
Alarm limit
check
IACCLOAL
IACCALM
POSCLOSE
IACCRST
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
GUID-DAC3746F-DFBF-4186-A99D-1D972578D32A-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 214:
GUID-75502A39-4835-4F43-A7ED-A80DC7C1DFA2 V1 EN
Figure 215:
The DiffTimeCorr setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the
energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation
of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to
the value set with the DiffTimeCorr setting. When the setting is negative, the
calculation starts in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary contact opens.
The accumulated energy outputs IACC_A (_B, _C) are available through the
Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The values
474
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
can be reset by setting the Clear accum. breaking curr setting to true in the clear menu
from LHMI.
13.16.7.6
I3P
I_B
I_C
CB life
estimator
Alarm limit
check
CBLIFEAL
POSCLOSE
CBCNTRST
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
GUID-1565CD41-3ABF-4DE7-AF68-51623380DF29-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 216:
Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
Section 13
Monitoring
of operations the breaker can perform at the rated current and at the rated fault current,
respectively.
.The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a
monitored data value CBLIFE_A (_B, _C). The values can be cleared by setting
the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from LHMI.
Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.
13.16.7.7
GUID-37EB9FAE-8129-45AB-B9F7-7F7DC829E3ED V1 EN
Figure 217:
476
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.16.7.8
GUID-A913D2D7-398B-41F6-9B21-BBCECD3F596D V1 EN
Figure 218:
The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals LOPRES and ALMPRES.
477
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the LOPRES binary input becomes
high, activating the lockout alarm PRESLO after a time delay set with the TPressLO
setting. The PRESLO alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input.
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from
the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLK_ALM.
13.16.8
Technical data
Table 354:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0-200) ms
0.5% 25 ms
(0 - 9999)
(0.00-60.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00-60.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00-60.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
13.17
13.17.1
Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.
The measurand reporting interval set for MMXU function blocks, using the xDbRepInt
and xAngDbRepInt settings, must be coordinated with the event reporting interval set
for the IEC 60870-5-103 communication using setting CycMeasRepTime.
478
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
GUID-B8A3A04C-430D-4488-9F72-8529FAB0B17D V1 EN
Figure 219:
13.17.2
Function block
I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F
ANSI10000287-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000287 V1 EN
Figure 220:
479
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.17.3
Signals
Table 355:
Name
13.17.4
Table 356:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
I_A
REAL
0.0
I_B
REAL
0.0
I_C
REAL
0.0
IN
REAL
0.0
V_A
REAL
0.0
V_B
REAL
0.0
V_C
REAL
0.0
V_AB
REAL
0.0
V_N
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
Settings
I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
MaxIa
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIb
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIc
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIN
1 - 99999
3000
MaxVa
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxVb
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxVc
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxVa-Vb
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
MaxVn
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxP
0.00 - 2000.00
MW
0.05
1200.00
MaxQ
0.00 - 2000.00
MVA
0.05
1200.00
MaxF
50.0 - 60.0
Hz
10.0
50.0
480
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.18
13.18.1
Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.
13.18.2
Function block
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN
Figure 221:
13.18.3
Signals
Table 357:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
REAL
0.0
INPUT2
REAL
0.0
INPUT3
REAL
0.0
INPUT4
REAL
0.0
INPUT5
REAL
0.0
INPUT6
REAL
0.0
INPUT7
REAL
0.0
INPUT8
REAL
0.0
INPUT9
REAL
0.0
481
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.18.4
Table 358:
Name
Settings
I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
25
InfNo
1 - 255
MaxMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur3
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
13.19
13.19.1
Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
482
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.19.2
Function block
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU
IEC10000289-1-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V1 EN
Figure 222:
13.19.3
Signals
Table 359:
Name
13.19.4
Table 360:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
16_ARACT
BOOLEAN
128_CBON
BOOLEAN
130_UNSU
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
13.20
13.20.1
Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
483
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.20.2
Function block
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN
Figure 223:
13.20.3
Signals
Table 361:
Name
13.20.4
Table 362:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
51_EFFW
BOOLEAN
52_EFREV
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
160
Description
Function type (1-255)
13.21
13.21.1
Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents
the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip
signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
484
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.21.2
Function block
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_PU_A
65_PU_B
66_PU_C
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TR_A
70_TR_B
71_TR_C
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTR_A
87_MTR_B
88_MTR_C
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
ANSI10000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000291 V1 EN
Figure 224:
13.21.3
Signals
Table 363:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
64_PU_A
BOOLEAN
65_PU_B
BOOLEAN
66_PU_C
BOOLEAN
67_STIN
BOOLEAN
68_TRGEN
BOOLEAN
69_TR_A
BOOLEAN
70_TR_B
BOOLEAN
71_TR_C
BOOLEAN
72_TRBKUP
BOOLEAN
485
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
Name
13.21.4
Table 364:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
73_SCL
REAL
74_FW
BOOLEAN
75_REV
BOOLEAN
76_TRANS
BOOLEAN
77_RECEV
BOOLEAN
78_ZONE1
BOOLEAN
79_ZONE2
BOOLEAN
80_ZONE3
BOOLEAN
81_ZONE4
BOOLEAN
82_ZONE5
BOOLEAN
84_STGEN
BOOLEAN
85_BFP
BOOLEAN
86_MTR_A
BOOLEAN
87_MTR_B
BOOLEAN
88_MTR_C
BOOLEAN
89_MTRN
BOOLEAN
90_IOC
BOOLEAN
91_IOC
BOOLEAN
92_IEF
BOOLEAN
93_IEF
BOOLEAN
ARINPROG
BOOLEAN
FLTLOC
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
128
Description
Function type (1-255)
486
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.22
13.22.1
Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined
for each input signal.
13.22.2
Function block
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
IEC10000292-1-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V1 EN
Figure 225:
13.22.3
Signals
Table 365:
Name
13.22.4
Table 366:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
19_LEDRS
BOOLEAN
21_TESTM
BOOLEAN
23_GRP1
BOOLEAN
24_GRP2
BOOLEAN
25_GRP3
BOOLEAN
26_GRP4
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
487
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.23
13.23.1
Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
13.23.2
Function block
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN
Figure 226:
13.23.3
Signals
Table 367:
Name
13.23.4
Table 368:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
32_MEASI
BOOLEAN
33_MEASU
BOOLEAN
37_IBKUP
BOOLEAN
38_VTFF
BOOLEAN
46_GRWA
BOOLEAN
47_GRAL
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
488
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.24
13.24.1
Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private
range, and the information number parameter for each input signal.
I103USRDEF can be used, for example in mapping the INF numbers not supported
directly by specific function blocks, like: INF17, INF18, INF20 or INF35. After
connecting the appropriate signals to the I103USRDEF inputs, the user must also set
the InfNo_x values in the settings.
GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN
Figure 227:
13.24.2
IEC 60870-5-103I103USRDEF:1
Function block
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN
Figure 228:
489
Technical Manual
Section 13
Monitoring
13.24.3
Signals
Table 369:
Name
13.24.4
Table 370:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
InfNo_1
1 - 255
InfNo_2
1 - 255
InfNo_3
1 - 255
InfNo_4
1 - 255
InfNo_5
1 - 255
InfNo_6
1 - 255
InfNo_7
1 - 255
InfNo_8
1 - 255
490
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
Section 14
Metering
14.1
14.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Pulse counter
IEC 60617
identification
PCGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00947 V1 EN
14.1.2
Functionality
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the BIO (binary input/output) module
and then read by the PCGGIO function. A scaled service value is available over the
station bus.
14.1.3
Function block
PCGGIO
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT
INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC09000335-2-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V2 EN
Figure 229:
491
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
14.1.4
Signals
Table 371:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
READ_VAL
BOOLEAN
BI_PULSE
BOOLEAN
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 373:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 372:
14.1.5
Default
Type
Description
INVALID
BOOLEAN
RESTART
BOOLEAN
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
NEW_VAL
BOOLEAN
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Settings
PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
EventMask
NoEvents
ReportEvents
NoEvents
CountCriteria
Disabled
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
RisingEdge
Scale
1.000 - 90000.000
0.001
1.000
Quantity
Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
Count
tReporting
1 - 3600
60
492
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
14.1.6
Monitored data
Table 374:
Name
14.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Operation principle
The registration of pulses is done according to setting of CountCriteria parameter on
one of the 9 binary input channels located on the BIO module. Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
active counters can also be read by IEC 61850.
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental
counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit
format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter value is stored in semiretain memory.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:
The transmission of the counter value can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be time tagged,
and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value
was frozen by the function.
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to blocks, which are intended
to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the
BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to
493
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.
14.1.8
Technical data
Table 375:
Function
Cycle time for report of
counter value
Setting range
(13600) s
Accuracy
-
494
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
14.2
14.2.1
Identification
Function description
Energy calculation and demand
handling
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ETPMMTR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Wh
IEC10000169 V1 EN
14.2.2
Functionality
Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate energy
consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and export
direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function.
14.2.3
Function block
ETPMMTR
P
Q
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
ACCST
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC09000104 V1 EN
Figure 230:
495
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
14.2.4
Signals
Table 376:
Name
Default
Description
REAL
REAL
STACC
BOOLEAN
RSTACC
BOOLEAN
RSTDMD
BOOLEAN
Table 377:
Name
Description
ACCST
BOOLEAN
EAFPULSE
BOOLEAN
EARPULSE
BOOLEAN
ERFPULSE
BOOLEAN
ERRPULSE
BOOLEAN
EAFALM
BOOLEAN
EARALM
BOOLEAN
ERFALM
BOOLEAN
ERRALM
BOOLEAN
EAFACC
REAL
EARACC
REAL
ERFACC
REAL
ERRACC
REAL
MAXPAFD
REAL
MAXPARD
REAL
MAXPRFD
REAL
MAXPRRD
REAL
496
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
14.2.5
Table 378:
Name
Settings
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
StartAcc
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tEnergy
1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
1 Minute
tEnergyOnPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tEnergyOffPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
EARAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
ERRAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
Table 379:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EALim
0.001 10000000000.000
MWh
0.001
1000000.000
ERLim
0.001 10000000000.000
MVArh
0.001
1000.000
EnZeroClamp
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
LevZeroClampP
0.001 - 10000.000
MW
0.001
10.000
LevZeroClampQ
0.001 - 10000.000
MVAr
0.001
10.000
DirEnergyAct
Forward
Reverse
Forward
DirEnergyReac
Forward
Reverse
Forward
EAFPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
EARPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
ERFPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
ERRPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
497
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
14.2.6
Monitored data
Table 380:
Name
14.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
EAFACC
REAL
MWh
EARACC
REAL
MWh
ERFACC
REAL
MVArh
ERRACC
REAL
MVArh
MAXPAFD
REAL
MW
MAXPARD
REAL
MW
MAXPRFD
REAL
MVAr
MAXPRRD
REAL
MVAr
Operation principle
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
(CVMMXN) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to
measure the integrated energy. The energy values (in MWh and MVarh) are available
as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter.
Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy
values can be reset from the local HMI reset menu or with input signal RSTACC.
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD, MAXPRRD
for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input
signal RSTDMD or from the local HMI reset menu.
498
Technical Manual
Section 14
Metering
CVMMXN
P_INST
Q_INST
ETPMMTR
P
Q
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN
Figure 231:
14.2.8
Technical data
Table 381:
Function
Energy metering
Accuracy
Input from MMXU. No extra error
at steady load
499
Technical Manual
500
Section 15
Station communication
Section 15
Station communication
15.1
DNP3 protocol
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to
communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
15.2
15.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
15.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 61850-8-1
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The IED supports the communication protocols IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP3 over TCP/
IP. All operational information and controls are available through these protocols.
However, some communication functionality, for example, horizontal communication
(GOOSE) between the IEDs, is only enabled by the IEC 61850-8-1 communication
protocol.
The IED is equipped with an optical Ethernet rear port for the substation
communication standard IEC 61850-8-1. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent
electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according to GOOSE is
part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
Disturbance files are accessed using the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. Disturbance files are
available to any Ethernet based application via FTP in the standard Comtrade format.
Further, the IED can send and receive binary values, double point values and measured
values (for example from MMXU functions), together with their quality, using the IEC
61850-8-1 GOOSE profile. The IED meets the GOOSE performance requirements for
tripping applications in substations, as defined by the IEC 61850 standard. The IED
501
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
interoperates with other IEC 61850-compliant IEDs, tools, and systems and
simultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850 station bus.
The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. The event channel has a quota
of 10 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the event channel transmission is blocked
until the event changes is below the quota, no event is lost.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated communication modules. The IED is connected to Ethernet-based
communication systems via the fibre-optic multimode LC connector (100BASE-FX).
The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a timestamping resolution of 1 ms.
The IED supports IEC 60870-5-103 time synchronization methods with a time
stamping resolution of 5 ms.
Table 382:
Interfaces/Protocols
Ethernet
100BASE-FX LC
IEC 61850-8-1
DNP3
ST connector
IEC 60870-5-103
= Supported
15.2.3
Table 383:
Name
Settings
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
GOOSE
Front
LAN1
LAN1
15.2.4
Technical data
Table 384:
Function
Value
Protocol
IEC 61850-8-1
100BASE-FX
502
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.3
15.3.1
Identification
Function description
Horizontal communication via GOOSE
for interlocking
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEINTLKR
CV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
503
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.3.2
Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK
^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL
IEC09000099_1_en.vsd
IEC09000099 V1 EN
Figure 232:
15.3.3
Signals
Table 385:
Name
BLOCK
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
504
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
Table 386:
Name
Description
RESREQ
BOOLEAN
Reservation request
RESGRANT
BOOLEAN
Reservation granted
APP1_OP
BOOLEAN
APP1_CL
BOOLEAN
APP1VAL
BOOLEAN
APP2_OP
BOOLEAN
APP2_CL
BOOLEAN
APP2VAL
BOOLEAN
APP3_OP
BOOLEAN
APP3_CL
BOOLEAN
APP3VAL
BOOLEAN
APP4_OP
BOOLEAN
APP4_CL
BOOLEAN
APP4VAL
BOOLEAN
APP5_OP
BOOLEAN
APP5_CL
BOOLEAN
APP5VAL
BOOLEAN
APP6_OP
BOOLEAN
APP6_CL
BOOLEAN
APP6VAL
BOOLEAN
APP7_OP
BOOLEAN
APP7_CL
BOOLEAN
APP7VAL
BOOLEAN
APP8_OP
BOOLEAN
APP8_CL
BOOLEAN
APP8VAL
BOOLEAN
APP9_OP
BOOLEAN
APP9_CL
BOOLEAN
APP9VAL
BOOLEAN
APP10_OP
BOOLEAN
APP10_CL
BOOLEAN
APP10VAL
BOOLEAN
APP11_OP
BOOLEAN
APP11_CL
BOOLEAN
APP11VAL
BOOLEAN
Section 15
Station communication
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
APP12_CL
BOOLEAN
APP12VAL
BOOLEAN
APP13_OP
BOOLEAN
APP13_CL
BOOLEAN
APP13VAL
BOOLEAN
APP14_OP
BOOLEAN
APP14_CL
BOOLEAN
APP14VAL
BOOLEAN
APP15_OP
BOOLEAN
APP15_CL
BOOLEAN
APP15VAL
BOOLEAN
COM_VAL
BOOLEAN
15.3.4
Settings
Table 387:
Name
Operation
Description
APP12_OP
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Description
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
15.4
15.4.1
Identification
Function description
Goose binary receive
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEBINRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
506
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.4.2
Function block
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK
^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL
IEC09000236_en.vsd
IEC09000236 V1 EN
Figure 233:
15.4.3
Signals
Table 388:
Name
BLOCK
Table 389:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
OUT1VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
OUT2VAL
BOOLEAN
507
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
Name
15.4.4
Table 390:
Name
Operation
Type
Description
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
OUT3VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
OUT4VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
OUT5VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
OUT6VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
OUT7VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
OUT8VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
OUT9VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary output 10
OUT10VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
OUT11VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
OUT12VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary output 13
OUT13VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary output 14
OUT14VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary output 15
OUT15VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary output 16
OUT16VAL
BOOLEAN
Settings
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
508
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.5
15.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
15.5.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSEDPRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value from the sender using
IEC61850 protocol over GOOSE.
15.5.3
Function block
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK
^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN
Figure 234:
15.5.4
Signals
Table 391:
Name
BLOCK
Table 392:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Description
DPOUT
INTEGER
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
509
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.5.5
Table 393:
Name
Operation
15.5.6
Settings
GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Enable/Disable
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be crossed in the SMT to receive
the double point values.
15.6
15.6.1
Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive an
integer value
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEINTRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
510
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.6.2
Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value from the sender using IEC61850
protocol over GOOSE.
15.6.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEINTRCV
^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN
Figure 235:
15.6.4
Signals
Table 394:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 395:
Table 396:
Name
Operation
15.6.6
Description
Block of function
Name
15.6.5
Default
Type
Description
INTOUT
INTEGER
Integer output
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Off/On
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
511
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be crossed in the SMT to receive
the integer values.
15.7
15.7.1
Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive a
measurand value
15.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEMVRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value from the sender using IEC61850
protocol over GOOSE.
15.7.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEMVRCV
^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN
Figure 236:
512
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.7.4
Signals
Table 397:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 398:
Table 399:
Name
Operation
15.7.6
Description
Block of function
Name
15.7.5
Default
Type
Description
MVOUT
REAL
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Enable/Disable
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be crossed in the SMT to receive
the float values.
513
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.8
15.8.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
15.8.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSESPRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value from the sender using IEC61850
protocol over GOOSE.
15.8.3
Function block
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK
^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN
Figure 237:
15.8.4
Signals
Table 400:
Name
BLOCK
Table 401:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Description
SPOUT
BOOLEAN
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
514
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.8.5
Table 402:
Name
Operation
15.8.6
Settings
GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Off/On
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be crossed in the SMT to receive
the binary single point values.
15.9
15.9.1
Functionality
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer
rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a
secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle.
The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages.
Function blocks available for the IEC 608705103 protocol are described in sections
Control and Monitoring.The Communication protocol manual for IEC 60870-5-103
includes the 650 series vendor specific IEC 60870-5-103 implementation.
515
Technical Manual
Section 15
Station communication
15.9.2
Table 403:
Settings
IEC60870-5-103 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation
SlaveAddress
1 - 31
Slave address
BaudRate
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
RevPolarity
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTime
1.0 - 1800.0
0.1
5.0
MasterTimeDomain
UTC
Local
Local with DST
UTC
TimeSyncMode
IEDTime
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
IEDTime
EvalTimeAccuracy
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
Off
5ms
EventRepMode
SeqOfEvent
HiPriSpont
SeqOfEvent
516
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Section 16
16.1
Binary input
16.1.1
16.1.2
Oscillation filter
Binary input lines can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields
from, for example, nearby breakers. Floating input lines can result in binary inputs'
activity. These events are unwanted traffic in the system. An oscillation filter is used to
reduce the load from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.
Each debounced input signal change increments an oscillation counter. Every time the
oscillation time counter reaches the set OscillationTime, the oscillation counter is
checked and both the counters are reset. If the counter value is above the set
OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating. If the value is below the set
OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as valid again. During counting of the
oscillation time the status of the signal remains unchanged, leading to a fixed delay in
the status update, even if the signal has attained normal status again.
Each binary input has an oscillation count parameter OscillationCount# and an
oscillation time parameter OscillationTime#, where # is the number of the binary input
of the module in question.
517
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Table 404:
Name
BatteryVoltage
Table 405:
Name
Unit
V
Step
1
Default
110
Description
Station battery voltage
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Threshold1
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime1
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount1
0 - 255
OscillationTime1
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold2
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime2
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount2
0 - 255
OscillationTime2
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold3
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime3
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount3
0 - 255
OscillationTime3
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold4
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime4
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount4
0 - 255
OscillationTime4
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold5
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime5
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount5
0 - 255
OscillationTime5
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold6
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime6
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount6
0 - 255
OscillationTime6
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold7
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime7
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
518
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OscillationCount7
0 - 255
OscillationTime7
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold8
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime8
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
DebounceTime8
0 - 255
OscillationTime8
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold9
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime9
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount9
0 - 255
OscillationTime9
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
16.2
16.2.1
Functionality
The Self supervision with internal event list (INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST)
function reacts to internal system events generated by the different built-in selfsupervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list.
16.2.2
16.2.2.1
Identification
16.2.2.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
INTERRSIG
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
IEC09000334-1-en.vsd
IEC09000334 V1 EN
Figure 238:
519
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.2.2.3
Signals
Table 406:
Name
16.2.2.4
Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
Internal fail
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Internal warning
TSYNCERR
BOOLEAN
RTCERR
BOOLEAN
DISABLE
BOOLEAN
Application Disable
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
16.2.3
16.2.3.1
Identification
Function description
Internal event list
16.2.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
SELFSUPEVLST
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
16.2.4
Operation principle
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
520
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Watchdog
TX overflow
Master resp.
Supply fault
Power supply
module
Fault
I/O nodes
Fault
AND
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL
Internal Fail (CPU)
CEM
Fault
IEC09000390-1-en.vsd
IEC09000390 V1 EN
Figure 239:
521
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
LIODEV FAIL
LIODEV STOPPED
LIODEV STARTED
>1
S
R
e.g.BIO1- ERROR
>1
IOM2- ERROR
WDOG STARVED
RTE FATAL ERROR
FTF FATAL ERROR
S
R
S
R
GENTS RTC OK
S
R
Internal Fail
>1
>1
SW Watchdog Error
Runtime Exec Error
S
R
>1
S
R
S
R
Change lock
GENTS SYNC OK
CHANGE LOCK ON
CHANGE LOCK OFF
SETTINGS CHANGED
SETTINGS CHANGED
Settings changed
IEC09000381-1-en.vsd
IEC09000381 V1 EN
Figure 240:
Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
INTERRSIG function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.
The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other
functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from
the time synchronization block INTERRSIG.
522
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.2.4.1
Internal signals
SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the
condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED,
they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.
Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 407.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 408.
Name of signal
Description
Internal Fail
Internal Warning
IEC61850 Error
SW Watchdog Error
Settings Changed
Settings changed
Change Lock
DNP3 Error
Table 408:
Card
Description
PSM
PSM-Error
TRM
TRM-Error
COM
COM-Error
BIO
BIO-Error
AIM
AIM-Error
RTD
RTD-Error
523
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Table 409:
Name of signal
16.2.4.2
Internal Fail
Internal Warning
This signal will be active if there is a hardware error with the real
time clock.
IEC61850 Error
This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed
in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example.
SW Watchdog Error
This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
Settings Changed
Change Lock
This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup
file are corrupted and cannot be recovered.
DNP3 Error
Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 241.
524
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
ADx
Adx_Low
x1
u1
x2
Adx_High
Adx
Controller
x1
u1
x2
en05000296-2-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V2 EN
Figure 241:
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal
conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm is
given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves the
dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller
function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the
validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, that
is the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times
higherADx_HI.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed
and an alarm will be given.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
16.2.5
Technical data
Table 410:
Data
Value
Recording manner
List size
525
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.3
Time synchronization
16.3.1
Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute
time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to
compare event- and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system
possible.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time
synchronization source.
16.3.2
16.3.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Time synchronization
16.3.2.2
Table 411:
Name
TIMESYNCHGE
N
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Disabled
SNTP
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
Disabled
FineSyncSource
Disabled
SNTP
IRIG-B
Disabled
SyncMaster
Disabled
SNTP-Server
Disabled
526
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.3.3
16.3.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.3.3.2
Table 412:
Name
SNTP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
SNTP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
16.3.4
16.3.4.1
Identification
Function description
Time system, summer time begins
IEC 61850
identification
DSTBEGIN
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
527
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.3.4.2
Table 413:
Name
Settings
DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
00:00
00:30
1:00
1:30
...
48:00
1:00
16.3.5
16.3.5.1
Identification
Function description
Time system, summer time ends
IEC 61850
identification
DSTEND
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
528
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.3.5.2
Table 414:
Name
Settings
DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
00:00
00:30
1:00
1:30
...
48:00
1:00
16.3.6
16.3.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.3.6.2
Table 415:
Name
NoHalfHourUTC
TIMEZONE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
-24 - 24
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
0
Description
Number of half-hours from UTC
529
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.3.7
16.3.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.3.7.2
Table 416:
Name
IRIG-B
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
16.3.8
Operation principle
16.3.8.1
General concepts
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time
the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the clock
accuracy and means how much the error increases, that is how much the clock gains or
loses time. A disciplined (trained) clock knows its own faults and tries to compensate
for them.
530
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
IRIG-B
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
Events
Protection
and control
functions
SW- time
ANSI09000210-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000210 V1 EN
Figure 242:
Synchronization principle
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN
Figure 243:
Synchronization principle
531
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.3.8.2
During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off,
the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time
the time will be lost completely.
The first message that contains the full time (as for instance SNTP and IRIG-B) gives
an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time is set to
the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three things happens with
each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as fine:
If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, from its
origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used
directly for synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the
synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 500
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe
state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the
threshold, the clock is adjusted with 10 000 ppm until the offset is removed. With
an adjustment of 10 000 ppm, it takes 50 seconds to remove an offset of 500
milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and
only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.
532
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for
a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is
constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.
All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally,
the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if
more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
16.3.8.3
Synchronization alternatives
Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The
synchronization message is applied either via any of the communication ports of the
IED as a telegram message including date and time or via IRIG-B.
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating
if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x
messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number
in the range of 1-7.
533
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
The DNP3 communication can be the source for the course time synchronization,
while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. See the
communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the DNP3 protocol.
The IEC60870-5-103 communication can be the source for the course time
synchronization, while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher
accuracy. See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol.
16.3.9
Technical data
Table 417:
Function
Value
1 ms
1.0 ms typically
1.0 ms typically
16.4
16.4.1
Functionality
Use the four sets of settings to optimize the IED operation for different system
conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets, either from the
local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can
cope with a variety of system scenarios.
534
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.4.2
16.4.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.4.2.2
Table 418:
Name
SETGRPS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup1
ActiveSettingGroup
MaxNoSetGrp
1-4
16.4.3
16.4.3.1
Identification
Function description
Parameter setting groups
16.4.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
ACTVGRP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1
ACTGRP2
ACTGRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP1
GRP2
GRP3
GRP4
GRP_CHGD
ANSI09000064-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000064 V1 EN
Figure 244:
535
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.4.3.3
Signals
Table 419:
Name
Type
Default
Description
ACTGRP1
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP2
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP3
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP4
BOOLEAN
Table 420:
Name
16.4.3.4
Description
GRP1
BOOLEAN
GRP2
BOOLEAN
GRP3
BOOLEAN
GRP4
BOOLEAN
GRP_CHGD
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
16.4.4
Operation principle
Parameter setting groups (ACTVGRP) function has four functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Five functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is
always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACTVGRP function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
536
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse.
The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1
IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4
ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
GRP_CHGD
ANSI09000063_1_en.vsd
ANSIC09000063 V1 EN
Figure 245:
The above example also includes five output signals, for confirmation of which group
that is active.
16.5
16.5.1
Identification
Function description
Test mode functionality
IEC 61850
identification
TESTMODE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
537
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.5.2
Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE function is activated, protection
functions in the IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock the
protection functions individually from the local HMI or the Parameter Setting tool to
perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.
16.5.3
Function block
TESTMODE
INPUT
ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT
IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN
Figure 246:
16.5.4
Signals
Table 421:
Name
INPUT
Table 422:
Name
Default
0
Description
Sets terminal in test mode when active
Description
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT
BOOLEAN
SETTING
BOOLEAN
NOEVENT
BOOLEAN
538
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.5.5
Table 423:
Name
Settings
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TestMode
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EventDisable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
CmdTestBit
Off
On
Off
16.5.6
Operation principle
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TESTMODE
is activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the generator
of the "Test mode: Enabled" state input from configuration (OUTPUT output is
activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING output is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event
signalling.
Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from
the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output
ACTIVE is activated). When leaving the test mode, that is entering normal mode, these
blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be
done with actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be
changed, thus no mistakes are possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
539
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED
will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also functions
that were unblocked before the change. During the re-entering to test
mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for a short time,
which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED
is put in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when
a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact
29-30) or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to
the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function
block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
maintenance test.
16.6
16.6.1
Identification
Function description
Change lock function
16.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
CHNGLCK
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED
configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked"
will be displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied
by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is
controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that
signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal
path to the CHNGLCK input, that logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently
540
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
issue a logical one on the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of
these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for remedial action.
16.6.3
Function block
CHNGLCK
LOCK*
ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000062-1-en.vsd
IEC09000062 V1 EN
Figure 247:
16.6.4
Signals
Table 424:
Name
LOCK
Table 425:
Name
16.6.5
Default
0
Description
Activate change lock
Description
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
OVERRIDE
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
16.6.6
Operation principle
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state
that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
541
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Set system time
Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input
Function
Activated
Deactivated
16.7
16.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IED identifiers
16.7.2
IEC 60617
identification
TERMINALID
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED
in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
16.7.3
Table 426:
Name
Settings
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
IEDMainFunType
0 - 255
TechnicalKey
0 - 18
AA0J0Q0A0
Technical key
16.8
Product information
16.8.1
Identification
16.8.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Product information
PRODINF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set,
settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:
IEDProdType
ProductDef
ProductVer
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiers
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
16.8.3
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
543
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.9
16.9.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.9.2
PRIMVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary values/PRIMVAL in the local HMI and
PCM600 parameter setting tree.
16.9.3
Table 427:
Name
Settings
PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Unit
Step
Default
Frequency
Values (Range)
50.0 - 60.0
Hz
10.0
50.0
Description
Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation
Normal=ABC
Inverse=ACB
Normal=ABC
16.10
16.10.1
Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs function SMAI (or the pre-processing function) is used
within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool or the Application
Configuration tool. Signal Matrix tool represents the way analog inputs are brought in
for one IED configuration.
16.10.2
16.10.2.1
Identification
Function description
Signal matrix for analog inputs
IEC 61850
identification
SMAI_20_1
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
544
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.10.2.2
Function block
SMAI_20_1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
^GRP1_A
^GRP1_B
^GRP1_C
^GRP1_N
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
ANSI09000137-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000137 V1 EN
Figure 248:
16.10.2.3
Signals
Table 428:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 1
DFTSPFC
REAL
20.0
REVROT
BOOLEAN
GRP1_A
STRING
GRP1_B
STRING
GRP1_C
STRING
GRP1_N
STRING
Table 429:
Name
Description
SPFCOUT
REAL
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
AIN
GROUP SIGNAL
545
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.10.2.4
Table 430:
Name
Settings
SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Table 431:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.10.3
16.10.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.10.3.2
IEC 60617
identification
SMAI_20_2
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
SMAI_20_2
BLOCK
REVROT
^GRP2_A
^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C
^GRP2_N
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
ANSI09000138-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000138 V1 EN
Figure 249:
16.10.3.3
Signals
Table 432:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 2
REVROT
BOOLEAN
GRP2_A
STRING
GRP2_B
STRING
GRP2_C
STRING
GRP2_N
STRING
547
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
Table 433:
Name
16.10.3.4
Table 434:
Name
Type
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
AIN
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
SMAI_20_2 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Table 435:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
548
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.10.4
Operation principle
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals
(three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see Figure 248 and
Figure 249. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog
signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc.
244 values in total). The BLOCK input will reset all outputs to 0.
The output signals AI1 to AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the,
in SMT or ACT, connected input group signals to GRPx_A, GRPx_B, GRPx_C and
GRPxN, x=1-12. GRPxN is always the neutral current. If GRPxN is not connected, the
AI4 output is all zero. The AIN output is the calculated residual sum of inputs
GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 and is equal to output AI4 if all inputs, including
GRPxN, are connected. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum
of current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT or ACT. Applications with a
few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.
The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.
16.11
16.11.1
Identification
Function description
Summation block 3 phase
16.11.2
IEC 61850
identification
3PHSUM
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of threephase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
549
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.11.3
Function block
3PHSUM
BLOCK
REVROT
^G1AI3P*
^G2AI3P*
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC09000201_1_en.vsd
IEC09000201 V1 EN
Figure 250:
16.11.4
Signals
Table 436:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block
REVROT
BOOLEAN
Reverse rotation
G1AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
G2AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 437:
Name
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
550
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.11.5
Table 438:
Name
Settings
3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 439:
Name
FreqMeasMinVal
16.11.6
Unit
%
Step
1
Default
10
Description
Magnitude limit for frequency calculation in %
of Vbase
Operation principle
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.
16.12
16.12.1
Identification
16.12.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
GBASVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common
for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values
for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.
551
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single
point for updating values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.
16.12.3
Table 440:
Name
Settings
GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
VBase
0.05 - 1000.00
kV
0.05
132.00
IBase
1 - 50000
1000
SBase
0.050 - 5000.000
MVA
0.001
229.000
16.13
16.13.1
Identification
Function description
Authority check
16.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
ATHCHCK
Description
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization
handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
16.13.3
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
552
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.13.4
Operation principle
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas
of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in table Table
441.
Table 441:
User type
Access rights
SystemOperator
ProtectionEngineer
All settings
DesignEngineer
UserAdministrator
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management Tool
(UMT) within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the
IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and
passwords.
16.13.4.1
553
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
If one or more users are created with the User Management Tool and written to the
key or when the user
IED, then, when a user attempts a Log on by pressing the
attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window opens.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the
key, one can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows.
After choosing the right user name, the user must press the
key
At successful Log on, the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the
bottom of the LCD. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log
on has failed, an "Error Access Denied" message opens. If a user enters an incorrect
password three times, that user will be blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to
log in can be performed. The user will be blocked from logging in, both from the local
HMI and PCM600. However, other users are to log in during this period.
16.14
16.14.1
Identification
Function description
Authority status
16.14.2
IEC 61850
identification
ATHSTAT
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.
554
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.14.3
Function block
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC09000235_en_1.vsd
IEC09000235 V1 EN
Figure 251:
16.14.4
Signals
Table 442:
Name
16.14.5
Type
Description
USRBLKED
BOOLEAN
LOGGEDON
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
16.14.6
Operation principle
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and
the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated.
16.15
Denial of service
16.15.1
Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit
overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication
facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device.
555
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads
can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
16.15.2
16.15.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.15.2.2
IEC 60617
identification
DOSFRNT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Function block
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000133-1-en.vsd
IEC09000133 V1 EN
Figure 252:
16.15.2.3
Signals
Table 443:
Name
16.15.2.4
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
556
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.15.2.5
Monitored data
Table 444:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
State
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
IPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
NonIPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
NonIPPackDisc
INTEGER
16.15.3
16.15.3.1
Identification
Function description
Denial of service, frame rate control for
LAN1 port
16.15.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
DOSLAN1
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
DOSLAN1
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000134-1-en.vsd
IEC09000134 V1 EN
Figure 253:
557
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
16.15.3.3
Signals
Table 445:
Name
16.15.3.4
Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
16.15.3.5
Monitored data
Table 446:
Name
16.15.4
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
State
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
IPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
NonIPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
NonIPPackDisc
INTEGER
Operation principle
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED load
from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control
and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:
558
Technical Manual
Section 16
Basic IED functions
559
Technical Manual
560
Section 17
IED physical connections
Section 17
17.1
561
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
GUID-C75F6FD4-485D-464D-B7B0-55FD1AA608E9 V1 EN
Figure 254:
562
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
17.2
Inputs
17.2.1
Measuring inputs
Table 447:
Terminal
TRM
8I + 2U
TRM
4I + 1I + 5U
AIM
6I + 4U
AIM
4I + 1I + 5U
X101-1, 2
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-3, 4
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-5, 6
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-7, 8
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-9, 10
1/5A
1/5A
0.1/0.5A
1/5A
0.1/0.5A
X102-1, 2
1/5A
1/5A
100/220V
1/5A
100/220V
X102-3, 4
100/220V
1/5A
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
X102-5, 6
100/220V
1/5A
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
X102-7, 8
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
X102-9, 10
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
17.2.2
Description
X410-1
- Input
X4103
+ Input
563
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
Table 449:
Case
Terminal
6U half 19
17.2.3
Description
X410-1
- Input
X4102
+ Input
Binary inputs
The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch
output contacts, to trigger the digital fault recorder or for remote control of IED
settings.
Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.
Table 450:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-1
X304-2
Binary input 1 +
COM_101
BI1
X304-3
Binary input 2 +
COM_101
BI2
X304-4
Binary input 3 +
COM_101
BI3
X304-5
Binary input 4 +
COM_101
BI4
X304-6
X304-7
Binary input 5 +
COM_101
BI5
X304-8
Binary input 6 +
COM_101
BI6
X304-9
Binary input 7 +
COM_101
BI7
X304-10
Binary input 8 +
COM_101
BI8
X304-11
X304-12
Binary input 9 +
COM_101
BI9
X304-13
Binary input 10 +
COM_101
BI10
X304-14
Binary input 11 +
COM_101
BI11
X304-15
X304-16
Binary input 12 +
COM_101
BI12
X304-17
Binary input 13 +
COM_101
BI13
X304-18
Binary input 14 +
COM_101
BI14
564
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
Table 451:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-1
- for input 1
BIO_3
BI1
X324-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_3
BI1
X324-3
X324-4
X324-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_3
BI2
X324-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_3
BI3
X324-7
X324-8
X324-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_3
BI4
X324-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_3
BI5
X324-11
X324-12
X324-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_3
BI6
X324-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_3
BI7
X324-15
X324-16
X324-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_3
BI8
X324-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_3
BI9
Table 452:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-1
- for input 1
BIO_4
BI1
X329-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_4
BI1
X329-3
X329-4
X329-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_4
BI2
X329-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_4
BI3
X329-7
X329-8
X329-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_4
BI4
X329-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_4
BI5
X329-11
Section 17
IED physical connections
Terminal
Description
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-12
X329-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_4
BI6
X329-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_4
BI7
X329-15
X329-16
X329-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_4
BI8
X329-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_4
BI9
Table 453:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X334-1
- for input 1
BIO_5
BI1
X334-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_5
BI1
X334-3
X334-4
X334-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_5
BI2
X334-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_5
BI3
X334-7
X334-8
X334-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_5
BI4
X334-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_5
BI5
X334-11
X334-12
X334-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_5
BI6
X334-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_5
BI7
X334-15
X334-16
X334-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_5
BI8
X334-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_5
BI9
566
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
Table 454:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X339-1
- for input 1
BIO_6
BI1
X339-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_6
BI1
X339-3
X339-4
X339-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_6
BI2
X339-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_6
BI3
X339-7
X339-8
X339-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_6
BI4
X339-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_6
BI5
X339-11
X339-12
X339-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_6
BI6
X339-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_6
BI7
X339-15
X339-16
X339-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_6
BI8
X339-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_6
BI9
17.3
Outputs
17.3.1
567
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
Table 455:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X307-2
PSM_102
BO1_PO_TCM
PSM_102
BO2_PO_TCM
PSM_102
BO3_PO_TCM
X307-4
+
Power output 3, normally open (TCM)
X307-5
X307-6
X307-7
PSM_102
BO4_PO
PSM_102
BO5_PO
PSM_102
BO6_PO
X307-8
X307-9
X307-10
X307-11
X307-12
Table 456:
Terminal
X321-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_3
BO1_PO
BIO_3
BO2_PO
BIO_3
BO3_PO
X321-2
X321-3
X321-4
X321-5
X321-6
Table 457:
Terminal
X326-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_4
BO1_PO
BIO_4
BO2_PO
X326-2
X326-3
568
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
Terminal
Description
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X326-4
X326-5
BIO_4
BO3_PO
X326-6
Table 458:
Terminal
X331-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_5
BO1_PO
BIO_5
BO2_PO
BIO_5
BO3_PO
X331-2
X331-3
X331-4
X331-5
X331-6
Table 459:
Terminal
X336-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_6
BO1_PO
BIO_6
BO2_PO
BIO_6
BO3_PO
X336-2
X336-3
X336-4
X336-5
X336-6
17.3.2
569
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
Table 460:
Terminal
X307-13
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
PSM_102
BO7_SO
PSM_102
BO8_SO
PSM_102
BO9_SO
X307-14
X307-15
X307-16
X307-17
X307-18
Table 461:
Terminal
X321-7
X321-8
Signal output 1
X321-9
X321-10
Signal output 2
X321-11
X321-12
Signal output 3
X321-13
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_3
BO4_SO
BIO_3
BO5_SO
BIO_3
BO6_SO
BIO_3
BO7_SO
X321-14
BIO_3
BO8_SO
X321-15
X321-16
BIO_3
BO9_SO
X321-17
X321-18
Table 462:
Terminal
X326-7
X326-8
Signal output 1
X326-9
X326-10
Signal output 2
X326-11
X326-12
Signal output 3
X326-13
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_4
BO4_SO
BIO_4
BO5_SO
BIO_4
BO6_SO
BIO_4
BO7_SO
Section 17
IED physical connections
Terminal
Description
X326-14
X326-15
X326-16
X326-17
X326-18
Table 463:
Terminal
Description
X331-8
Signal output 1
X331-9
X331-10
Signal output 2
X331-11
X331-12
Signal output 3
X331-13
X331-14
X331-15
X331-16
X331-17
X331-18
Terminal
BIO_4
BO8_SO
BIO_4
BO9_SO
X331-7
Table 464:
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_5
BO4_SO
BIO_5
BO5_SO
BIO_5
BO6_SO
BIO_5
BO7_SO
BIO_5
BO8_SO
BIO_5
BO9_SO
X336-7
X336-8
Signal output 1
X336-9
X336-10
Signal output 2
X336-11
X336-12
Signal output 3
X337-13
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_6
BO4_SO
BIO_6
BO5_SO
BIO_6
BO6_SO
BIO_6
BO7_SO
X336-14
BIO_6
BO8_SO
X336-15
Section 17
IED physical connections
Terminal
17.3.3
Description
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X336-16
X336-17
X336-18
BIO_6
BO9_SO
IRF
The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision
system of the IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one of
the two contacts is closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or
the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other contact
closes.
Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.
Table 465:
Case
6U half 19
17.4
Description
X309-1
X309-2
X309-3
IRF, common
Communication connections
The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. The connector is intended for
configuration and setting purposes.
Rear communication via the X1/LAN1 connector uses a communication module with
the optical LC Ethernet connection.
The HMI connector X0 is used for connecting an external HMI to the IED. The X0/
HMI connector must not be used for any other purpose.
17.4.1
572
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
The events and setting values and all input data such as memorized values and
disturbance records can be read via the front communication port.
Only one of the possible clients can be used for parametrization at a time.
PCM600
LHMI
17.4.2
17.4.3
17.4.4
Protocol
Ethernet
Serial
Plastic fibre (snap-in
connector)
100BASE-TX RJ-45
100BASE-FX LC
IEC 6185081
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
= Supported
17.4.5
573
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
RuggedCom RS900
RuggedCom RS1600
RuggedCom RSG2100
574
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
17.5
Connection diagrams
17.5.1
575
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
576
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
577
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
578
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
579
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
580
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
581
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
582
Technical Manual
17.5.2
Section 17
IED physical connections
Connection diagrams for REG650 B05A
583
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
584
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
585
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
586
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
587
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
588
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
589
Technical Manual
Section 17
IED physical connections
590
Technical Manual
Section 18
Technical data
Section 18
Technical data
18.1
Dimensions
Table 467:
Description
18.2
Value
Width
Height
Depth
Weight box
Weight LHMI
Power supply
Table 468:
Power supply
Description
Vn
600PSM02
100, 110, 120, 220, 240 V AC,
50 and 60 Hz
600PSM03
48, 60, 110, 125 V DC
80...120% of Vn (38.4...150 V
DC)
35 W
50 ms at Vn
591
Technical Manual
Section 18
Technical data
18.3
Energizing inputs
Table 469:
Energizing inputs
Description
Value
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Operating range
Rated frequency 5 Hz
Current inputs
Rated current, In
0.1/0.5 A1)
1/5 A2)
Continuously
4A
20 A
For 1 s
100 A
500 A
For 10 s
20 A
100 A
250 A
1250 A
Input impedance
<100 m
<20 m
Rated voltage, Vn
Voltage inputs
Half-wave value
Voltage withstand:
Continuous
420 V rms
For 10 s
450 V rms
<0.05 VA
1) Residual current
2) Phase currents or residual current
18.4
Binary inputs
Table 470:
Binary inputs
Description
Value
Operating range
Rated voltage
24...250 V DC
Current drain
1.6...1.8 mA
Power consumption/input
<0.3 W
Threshold voltage
592
Technical Manual
Section 18
Technical data
18.5
Signal outputs
Table 471:
Description
18.6
Value
Rated voltage
250 V AC/DC
5A
10 A
30 A
Power outputs
Table 472:
Description
Value
Rated voltage
250 V AC/DC
8A
15 A
30 A
1 A/0.3 A/0.1 A
Table 473:
Description
Value
Rated voltage
250 V DC
8A
15 A
30 A
1 A/0.3 A/0.1 A
20...250 V DC
~1.0 mA
20 V DC
593
Technical Manual
Section 18
Technical data
18.7
Ethernet interfaces
Ethernet interface
Protocol
Cable
100 MBits/s
LAN1 (X1)
TCP/IP protocol
100 MBits/s
Table 475:
Wave length
1300 nm
Connector
LC
Permitted path
attenuation1)
<8 dB
Distance
2 km
Table 476:
X4/IRIG-B interface
Type
Protocol
Table 477:
IRIG-B
Type
Counter connector
18.8
Cable
Enclosure class
Table 478:
Description
Value
Front side
IP 40
Table 479:
Description
Front and side
594
Technical Manual
Section 18
Technical data
18.9
Environmental conditions
Description
Value
-25...+55C (continuous)
-40...+70C (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25...+55C
Relative humidity
<93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure
Altitude
-40...+85C
Table 481:
Environmental tests
Description
Cold tests
Reference
operation
96 h at -25C
16 h at -40C
IEC 60068-2-1/ANSI
C37.90-2006 (chapter 4)
storage
96 h at -40C
operation
16 h at +70C
storage
96 h at +85C
steady state
240 h at +40C
humidity 93%
IEC 60068-2-78
cyclic
IEC 60068-2-30
IEC 60068-2-2/ANSI
C37.90-2006 (chapter 4)
595
Technical Manual
596
Section 19
IED and functionality tests
Section 19
19.1
Description
Reference
IEC 61000-4-18
IEC 60255-22-1, level 3
ANSI C37.90.1-2002
Common mode
2.5 kV
Differential mode
2.5 kV
IEC 61000-4-2
IEC 60255-22-2, level 4
ANSI C37.90.3-2001
Contact discharge
8 kV
Air discharge
15 kV
IEC 61000-4-6
IEC 60255-22-6, level 3
Radiated, amplitudemodulated
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-22-3, level 3
ANSI C37.90.2-2004
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4, class A
ANSI C37.90.1-2002
Communication ports
4 kV
Other ports
4 kV
IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 60255-22-5, level 3/2
Communication
1 kV line-to-ground
Other ports
2 kV line-to-ground, 1 kV line-toline
Section 19
IED and functionality tests
Description
3s
1000 A/m
Continuous
100 A/m
Common mode
300 V rms
Differential mode
150 V rms
Dips:
40%/200 ms
70%/500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0... s : Correct behaviour at
power down
19.2
IEC 60255-11
IEC 61000-4-11
EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-25
Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)
0.15...0.50 MHz
0.5...30 MHz
Reference
Radiated RF-emission
30...230 MHz
230...1000 MHz
Insulation tests
Table 483:
Insulation tests
Description
Dielectric tests:
Test voltage
Reference
IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
598
Technical Manual
Section 19
IED and functionality tests
Description
Test voltage
Reference
Insulation resistance
measurements
Isolation resistance
IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
>100 M, 500 V DC
19.3
Resistance
<0.1 (60 s)
Mechanical tests
Table 484:
Mechanical tests
Description
19.4
IEC 60255-27
Reference
Requirement
IEC 60255-21-1
Class 2
IEC60255-21-1
Class 1
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
Bump test
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
Seismic test
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 2
Product safety
Table 485:
Description
Product safety
Reference
LV directive
2006/95/EC
Standard
EN 60255-27 (2005)
599
Technical Manual
Section 19
IED and functionality tests
19.5
EMC compliance
Table 486:
Description
EMC compliance
Reference
EMC directive
2004/108/EC
Standard
EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)
600
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
Section 20
20.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different
points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used.
The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated
applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are
shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.
IPickup
IPickup
IPickup
xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN
Figure 255:
Time
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN
Figure 256:
601
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN
Figure 257:
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
602
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A1
B1
51
51
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000132 V1 EN
Figure 258:
where:
t=0
t=t1
is Protection B1 trips
t=t2
is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time
t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its
delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between
the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the
B1 circuit breaker.
At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault
current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The
maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the
timer of protection A1 is active.
At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible
when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of
delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:
603
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, picks
up and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.
20.2
Operation principle
20.2.1
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available.
If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value , a timer, according to the
selected operating mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of the
three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached
or until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and
the reset time has elapsed.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 101.
A
t [s ] =
P
Pickupn
-C
+ B td
(Equation 101)
EQUATION1640 V1 EN
where:
p, A, B, C
Pickupn
td
604
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
( top - B td ) Pickupn
-C
= A td
(Equation 102)
EQUATION1642 V1 EN
where:
top
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 103, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
Pickupn
0
- C dt A td
(Equation 103)
EQUATION1643 V1 EN
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
i ( j ) P
A td
C
Pickupn
j =1
Dt
(Equation 104)
EQUATION1644 V1 EN
where:
j=1
i
Pickupn
>1
EQUATION1646 V1 EN
Dt
is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j)
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
605
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 259.
Operate
time
tMin
IMin
Current
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN
Figure 259:
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 106:
606
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
td
t [s ] =
0.339 - 0.235 Pickupn
i
(Equation 106)
EQUATION1647 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The
curve is described by equation 107:
[ ]
t s = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
td Pickupn
(Equation 107)
EQUATION1648 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td
The timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current
level minus the hysteresis.
20.3
607
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
Table 487:
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
Accuracy
ANSI/IEEE C37.112,
class 5 + 40 ms
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 488:
Function
Operating characteristic:
Range or value
Accuracy
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
t =
A
P
td
( I - 1)
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
608
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
Table 489:
Function
Range or value
t =
0.339 -
0.236
Accuracy
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
td
I
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 490:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01 unless otherwise
stated
td
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01 unless otherwise
stated
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
2.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1662 V1 EN
Type C curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01 unless otherwise
stated
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1663 V1 EN
609
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
Table 491:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01 unless otherwise
stated
td
VPickup - V
VPickup
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
EQUATION1658 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td 480
VPickup - V
32
VPickup
- 0.5
2.0
+ 0.055
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01 unless otherwise
stated
EQUATION1659 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Table 492:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
Accuracy
Class 5 +40 ms
td
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
2.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1662 V1 EN
Type C curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1663 V1 EN
610
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070750 V2 EN
Figure 260:
611
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070751 V2 EN
Figure 261:
612
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070752 V2 EN
Figure 262:
613
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070753 V2 EN
Figure 263:
614
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070817 V2 EN
Figure 264:
615
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070818 V2 EN
Figure 265:
616
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070819 V2 EN
Figure 266:
617
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070820 V2 EN
Figure 267:
618
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070821 V2 EN
Figure 268:
619
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070822 V2 EN
Figure 269:
620
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070823 V2 EN
Figure 270:
621
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070824 V2 EN
Figure 271:
622
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070825 V2 EN
Figure 272:
623
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070826 V2 EN
Figure 273:
624
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
A070827 V2 EN
Figure 274:
625
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
Figure 275:
626
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
Figure 276:
627
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
Figure 277:
628
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
Figure 278:
629
Technical Manual
Section 20
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
Figure 279:
630
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
Section 21
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
ACT
A/D converter
Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS
AI
Analog input
ANSI
AR
Autoreclosing
ASCT
ASD
AWG
BI
Binary input
BOS
BR
BS
British Standards
CAN
CB
Circuit breaker
CCITT
CCVT
Class C
CMPPS
CMT
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Codirectional
631
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
COMTRADE
Contra-directional
CPU
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
CROB
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CVT or CCVT
DAR
Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA
DBDL
DBLL
DC
Direct current
DFC
DFT
DHCP
DIP-switch
DI
Digital input
DLLB
DNP
DR
Disturbance recorder
DRAM
DRH
DSP
DTT
EHV network
EIA
632
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EnFP
EPA
ESD
Electrostatic discharge
FCB
FOX 20
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus
G.703
GCM
GDE
GI
GIS
Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE
GPS
HDLC protocol
HFBR connector
type
HMI
Human-machine interface
HSAR
HV
High-voltage
HVDC
IDBS
IEC
IEC 60044-6
IEC 61850
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
IEEE
IEEE 802.12
IEEE P1386.1
IED
I-GIS
Instance
IP
IP 20
IP 40
Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP40Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54
IRF
IRIG-B:
ITU
LAN
LIB 520
LCD
634
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
LDD
LED
Light-emitting diode
MCB
MCM
MVB
NCC
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OLTC
OV
Over-voltage
Overreach
PCI
PCM
PCM600
PC-MIP
PISA
PMC
POR
Permissive overreach
POTT
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
PST
PT ratio
PUTT
RASC
RCA
RFPP
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
RMS value
RS422
RS485
RTC
Real-time clock
RTU
SA
Substation Automation
SBO
Select-before-operate
SC
SCS
SCADA
SCT
SDU
SMA connector
SMT
SMS
SNTP
SRY
ST
Starpoint
SVC
TC
Trip coil
TCS
TCP
TCP/IP
636
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
UMT
Underreach
U/I-PISA
UTC
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
VT
Voltage transformer
X.21
3IO
Technical Manual
Section 21
Glossary
638
Technical Manual
639
ABB Inc.
940 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Phone
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8
ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Phone
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8
Contact us